工作总结 >> 资料 >> 大学课件 >> 导航 >>

大学库课件(精品十五篇)

大学库课件

发布时间： 2023.11.21

大学库课件(精品十五篇)。

教案课件是我们老师的一项重要职责，因此每天老师都会按时按质地编写好教案课件。教案对于实现课程教学目标起着重要的保障作用。如果您正在寻找“大学库课件”相关内容，请查看下面的推荐，建议收藏此页以备后续查阅所需！

大学库课件【篇1】

清华大学课件

清华大学是中国著名的教育机构之一，其教育内容和质量在国内外享有高声誉。其中，清华大学的课件也是该校值得关注的一项教育元素。本文就清华大学课件这一话题展开讨论。

首先，清华大学课件的特点是丰富而全面。该校的课件内容涵盖自然科学、社会科学、工程技术、法律经济等众多领域，囊括了大量的现代化、前沿性的知识。在这些课件中，学生可以接触到最新的研究成果和应用成果，促进了他们对知识的理解与掌握。

其次，清华大学课件的特点是具备高度的翻译水平。该校的许多课件被翻译成了多种语言，包括英语、法语等，使得国内外的孔子学院、留学生等也能够在清华大学的课件中深入学习和了解中国的现代化发展、文化与人文底蕴。同时，清华大学课件中的对外汉语教学也备受赞誉，为更多的外国人提供学习汉语的机会。

此外，清华大学课件的特点还在于其实现了教学资源的共享。通过在互联网上提供教学视频、课件下载等一系列资源，学校在极大地推动了教学模式的变革，让学生和教师可以在足不出门的情况下参与到全球范围内知识的共享、交流和合作之中，为全球化教育做出贡献。

不仅如此，清华大学课件在信息交流和互动上也表现出色。学校提供的各种交流平台，让学生、教师和校外人士可以进行线上互动，交流各自的教学和研究成果，促进了学校内部和校外的知识传播。

综上所述，清华大学课件是该校优秀教育资源的重要组成部分，其丰富的内容、高水准的翻译和共享、互动特点都体现了其在教学上所取得的成就，这无疑为该校长期以来与国内外优秀大学的竞争中取得了领先地位。

大学库课件【篇2】

清华大学课件作为高等教育领域的重要资源，不仅代表着清华教育的水准，更是许多学生学习和研究的重要依据。本文将就“清华大学课件”这一主题，从清华大学课件的历史沿革、发展现状、价值特色及应用前景等方面进行论述。

一、清华大学课件的历史沿革

清华大学创建于1911年，历经百年发展，其教育及课程设置、课程教学方法、教育内容等方面均处于国内外领先地位。随着计算机、互联网等信息技术的快速发展，清华大学也积极探索信息技术教育与传授，特别是在 21 世纪初，随着互联网技术普及，清华大学也开始致力于将其教育资源数字化，为师生提供更优质的在线学习体验。在此背景下，清华大学开始陆续推出课件资源分享平台，自此诞生了“清华大学课件”。

二、清华大学课件的发展现状

随着最新的信息技术与课程体系的紧密融合，清华大学课件得以不断迭代更新，课件资源也得到了更加全面和精细的整理。当前，清华大学课件拥有自己的官方网站，为世界各地的学习者提供优质的学习资源。清华大学课件涉及的学科范围广泛，包括了计算机科学、工程、数学、物理学、经济学、文学等多个方向的课程资源。除此之外，清华大学还与国内外很多大学和研究机构合作，共享各类知识和资源。

三、清华大学课件的价值特色

作为清华大学教育的重要组成部分，清华大学课件不仅满足了学生们的学习需求，更具有以下特点：

1.精细化的教学体系：清华大学课件是清华大学近一百年教学体系的人类智慧结晶，其严谨的教学体系是难得一见的国内外知名大学教育资源。

2、全面的学科涵盖：清华大学课件提供的学科方向涵盖了多个领域，并且每个学科涵盖丰富、全面的内容，在为学生提供高端知识和技能的同时，拓宽了学生的知识领域。

3、自由的学习时间：清华大学课件资源是24小时在线免费为学生提供的，每个人都可以选好自己的时间学习，自由度大大增加。

四、清华大学课件的应用前景

目前，清华大学课件已成为各高校和科研机构学习资源的重要来源。伴随着移动互联的逐渐发展，人们的学习方式逐渐从传统班级授课转向线上自习。清华大学课件为这一趋势提供了强有力的支持，为全球学习者提供了一个便捷、高效、精品的学习平台。可以预见，未来，清华大学课件将会在高等教育领域发挥更加重要的作用。

五、结语

综上所述，清华大学课件是清华大学教育资源的一种重要体现，具有严谨的教学体系、全面的学科内容、自由的学习时间以及优秀的应用前景等价值特色。其在线学习平台为全球学习者提供了优秀的学习机会，进而推动了高等教育的普及与更新。

大学库课件【篇3】

一、教学设想：

我所讲的课文选自人教版课程标准实验教材小学语文二年级上册第六单元《假如》一课。

《假如》一诗，借马良的神笔，表达了对小树、小鸟、残疾人的发自内心的关爱。这些关爱，显示了儿童的一颗博大而纯真的心。学诗时，学生可能会产生许多的假如，也可能产生写诗的冲动。这都要建立在关爱之情的基础之上。这篇课文的教学，要启发学生关爱他人，关爱生活，关爱环境。

并且，本组教材的立意所在是“关爱他人”!有必要让学生在启蒙时期，便学习用真情获得真情，用关爱赢得关爱!这里有体现强烈情感对比的对子;有表现同学之间友爱的文章;有表现关心有困难的人的日记;有体现热爱家乡、珍惜友情的古诗。每篇课文都饱含着爱的真情。这是一组很好的能培养学生爱心，获得美好人生体验的情感教育素材。应引导学生反复朗读和调动学生的生活见闻，感知教材，感悟社会，关心社会。

认识9个生字，能正确、流利、有感情的朗读课文。

2、过程与方法目标：

通过学生自学、交流、合作，让学生自主识字，感悟课文，领会阅读方法。

3、情感、态度、价值观目标：

陶冶美好的的情操，有关爱他人、关爱环境的愿望。

我觉得启蒙时期的儿童天真纯净的如一泓清泉。他们欢快流动的过程，就是体验人生，感悟自然的过程，是花蕾含苞正放的过程。

我们二年级的儿童经过一年的学习，已对识字方法、朗读方法有一定的了解和掌握，因此，这部分内容是儿童原有认知基础上的教学，并且，孩子能够明白在生活中我们要去关爱他人，因为每一个儿童都有一颗博大而纯真的心，儿童充满了想象力、创造力，他们希望认识社会、改造自然。在儿童的心灵里，有着赤子般的真情，有着火山喷发般的力量。在《假如》一诗中，他们的愿望借助“马良的神笔”得到了实现。虽然他们往往只能“假如”，但是这些“假如”都是他们对生活、对大自然的独特认识，是他们对美好事物的向往和追求。

如果没有课程资源的广泛支持，再美好的课程设想也将变成一纸空文。因此，我们教师必须开发和利用好这无所不在的课程资源，为我们的语文教学服务。由此，我课前制作了多媒体课件，并借助课件及音乐资源等进行直观教学，帮助理解文意，激发学生的学习兴趣，使课堂充满亲和力，洋溢着快乐与情趣，也是为了让学生学的轻松，学的快乐。

我认为，理想的课堂，就像一座强大的磁场，正如乌申斯基说的：“如果最初的教学充满了形象、色彩、声音，总之，能被儿童多种感官所接受，这时，我们就使自己所讲授的知识被儿童所接受。”所以，我们教师必须为学生创设一定的情境，烘托气氛，产生悬念，激起学生的兴趣和求知欲。如“课件的演示，小老师的尝试、音乐基调的熏陶与感染”等，都能够不断的启发学生的思维，体现人文关怀。

语文教学重要的是教会学生如何学习，如何掌握学习的方法自己学习。如本课中：识字时，我让学生说一说你是用什么方法记住这些字的?读文时，让学生去自学、感悟、理解、交流、探究。学生只有掌握了学习方法，日后才能依次类推、或举一反三、或有所创新，形成自学能力。

《语文课程标准》指出“要珍视学生是独特感受、体验和理解”。的确，我们面对的是活生生、有血、有肉、有情感的孩子，他们的体验绝不容我们忽视。因此，我让学生联系自己谈谈对这篇“寓意深刻”的诗歌的独自想法，培养学生的想象力、创造力。尊重学生的体验和感受，让学生在独自的体验中健康的成长为有想法、有情意、有个性的人，有关爱弱势群体的愿望。

大学库课件【篇4】

选择

Nowadays, young people have more choices than any generation before them. They can choose what they want to study, where they want to live, whom they want to marry and how they want to live their life in general. However, having too many choices can sometimes be overwhelming and lead to indecision. In this essay, we will discuss the concept of choice overload, how it affects decision-making and what can be done to mitigate its negative effects.

The concept of choice overload has been extensively studied by psychologists and marketers alike. In the famous jam experiment, conducted by psychologists Sheena Iyengar and Mark Lepper, customers at a supermarket were given a choice between 24 different flavors of jam or 6 different flavors of jam. Interestingly, while more people stopped to sample the jams when there were 24 options, fewer people actually made a purchase compared to when there were only 6 options. This study and others like it have shown that having too many choices can lead to decision fatigue, as well as regret about missed opportunities.

So, how do we mitigate the negative effects of choice overload? One way is to actively limit our choices. For example, before going to a restaurant, we can research the menu and decide what we want to order beforehand. This eliminates the need to choose from a large menu under time pressure. Another way is to categorize and prioritize our options, such as by making a list of pros and cons or ranking the choices by importance.

In conclusion, choice overload is a modern phenomenon that can be both a blessing and a curse. While having more choices can offer us the freedom to live our lives on our own terms, it can also lead to decision paralysis and regret. The key is to find a balance between too many options and too few, and to actively manage our choices to reduce the negative side effects.

大学库课件【篇5】

清华大学课件

清华大学是中国最顶尖的大学之一，其所授课程涵盖了众多领域，如工程、科学、人文等。这些课程中的一些内容已经被整理成了清华大学课件，以方便学生们进行学习。在这篇文章中，我们将讨论以下主题：“清华大学课件的概述、清华大学课件的优劣、清华大学课件的改进点”。

一、清华大学课件的概述

清华大学课件是由清华大学教育技术中心制作的一种教学工具。清华大学教育技术中心的理念是利用现代信息技术手段支持现代教育，提高教学质量和效率。由此，清华大学课件应运而生。

目前，清华大学课件涵盖了大部分的知识领域。学生可以通过清华大学课件在线学习，也可以下载到本地进行学习。它的优点是可以在学生离开教室或图书馆的情况下自主学习，而且学生可以在自己的节奏和时间里学习。

二、清华大学课件的优劣

在使用清华大学课件期间，我们可以看到它的优缺点。下面是它的优势和劣势：

优势：

1.具有便携性：清华大学课件可以在线或离线进行学习，可以随时随地使用。

2. 自主性：学生可以自主安排学习的时间和地点，学习速度也可以由学生自主决定。

3. 对老师的支持：课件能够帮助老师进行教学，可以让老师提高教学质量和效率。

4. 多媒体性：清华大学课件不仅具有文字和图片，还包括音频、视频等多媒体资料，可以让学生多角度地学习。

缺点：

1.没有互动性：清华大学课件是单向的，无法和学生互动。

2. 内容重复：有些内容可能在课件中和在书中重复，浪费学生的时间。

3.缺少诱发兴趣的元素：有些课程内容可能需要一些额外的参考资料或额外的材料，来诱发学生的兴趣。

三、清华大学课件的改进点

清华大学课件的缺点也让我们看到了它的改进空间。我们可以通过改进点，来优化清华大学课件。

1. 增加互动性。清华大学课件应该增加与学生的互动元素，使学生能够参与到教学中去。

2. 符合学生成长的需求。清华大学课件应该符合学生的能力水平和知识背景，不应该过于深入或过于浅薄。

3. 增加视听材料的数量和质量。清华大学课件应该加入更多的视听材料，以吸引学生的注意力。

4. 增加知识元素的多样性。清华大学课件应该增加一些新颖的知识元素，以增加学生的兴趣。

结论

清华大学课件是清华大学教育技术中心为学生提供的一种有效的教学工具。它方便了学生的学习，提高了教学效率。尽管它有一些缺点，但是清华大学教育技术中心还是在努力改进，使它能够更好地服务于学生的学习。

大学库课件【篇6】

The Importance of Learning English in College

English is an international language that is spoken and used everywhere in the world. It is recognized as the global language of communication, business, science, and education. In this context, learning English is increasingly becoming essential for college students who want to build successful careers in the global arena. In this essay, I will discuss the importance of learning English in college and how it can help students achieve their goals.

Firstly, learning English is important to students because it is the language of instruction in most universities worldwide. In order to succeed in their college education, students must be able to understand lectures, read academic texts, and write research papers in English. Moreover, most scientific and academic journals are written in English, making it the language of choice for research and scientific discovery. Therefore, it is essential for college students to have a good command of English in order to excel in their academic pursuits.

Secondly, learning English can improve students’ job prospects and career opportunities. Many multinational companies and organizations require their employees to have strong English language skills. Being proficient in English can open doors to a wide range of job opportunities and career paths that are not available to those who are not fluent in the language. Additionally, English is the language of global business, commerce, and trade. Consequently, having English language skills can give college graduates an edge in business negotiations, marketing, and international trade.

Thirdly, learning English can broaden students’ cultural horizons and enhance their personal growth. English is a language of culture, literature, music, and art. Learning it can expose students to the world’s diverse cultures and help them appreciate different perspectives. English language skills can also facilitate social and cultural interactions with people from different backgrounds, making college life more meaningful and enjoyable.

In conclusion, learning English is a necessary and valuable investment for college students. It can facilitate academic success, career growth, and personal development. Therefore, students should take advantage of every opportunity to improve their English skills, whether it be through language classes, practicing reading and writing, or engaging in conversations with English speakers. By doing so, they will be equipped with the skills and knowledge needed to succeed in an increasingly competitive and globalized world.

大学库课件【篇7】

教学目标：

一片自然的风景，就是一个心灵的世界。散文，是作者的内心独白，读散文，要随着作者笔下的文字走进那片世界，感受作者的所见所闻，体察作者的所思所感。

l 这个地点在以后我的生涯中总是被我反复回忆咀嚼吟味，我总是无法忘记它。仿佛它是我人生的答案。

l 三条巨流般的黑戈壁，平平地铺向三个可怕的远方。三个方向都像可怕的暗示。

l 汉家寨，如一枚被人丢弃的棋子，如一粒生锈的弹丸，孤零零地存在于这巨大得恐怖的大自然中。

l 老小二人都是汉人服色，一瞬间我明白了，这地方确实叫汉家寨。

l 砦就是寨，都是人紧守的地方。

l 无论我走到哪里，都在不知不觉间，坚守着什么。我只觉得它与汉家寨这地名天衣无缝。

3、秦牧《散文创作谈》：“用一根红线穿起生活的珍珠，珍珠才不会遍地乱滚，这才能成为整齐的珠串。”

1、举三反一，课外阅读散文，进一步体会散文红线串珠、形散神聚的特点。

大学库课件【篇8】

清华大学课件

作为中国最顶尖的高等教育机构之一，清华大学一直致力于提供卓越的教育和培养优秀的人才。在这个过程中，清华大学的教授们使用的课件也在不断更新、改进和创新。本文将着重讨论清华大学课件的相关主题，包括其优点、缺点以及如何让清华大学课件更加高效地促进教学效果。

清华大学课件的优点

首先，清华大学课件有一个显著的优点是，其内容多样、丰富。清华大学的教授经常使用各种媒介和科技手段，以更好地展示教学内容。清华大学课件不仅可以简洁明了地展示知识点，还可用于演示数据、图片、视频等形式的资料，使学生更直观地理解教学内容。

其次，清华大学课件在设计上更加人性化、易懂易学。相比传统的讲解方式，清华大学课件更加灵活，能够针对不同学习者的需求进行调整。震动效果、动画、互动内容等也能激发学生的兴趣，增加学生参与度。此外，清华大学的教授们也会通过多种渠道及时收集学生反馈，根据学生反馈再对课件进行改进和完善，以让学生更加顺畅地掌握知识。

清华大学课件的缺点

尽管清华大学课件有很多优点，但它仍有一些缺点。其中一个缺点是冗长的内容让学生容易失去耐心。有些教授制作的课件过多精力放在了排版、图片等美学元素上，而忽略了核心内容。此外，清华大学课件也可能存在内容繁杂、难度过高等问题，无法满足学生的实际需求。为了克服这些问题，教授们应当加强对课件的可读性和语言表达的精炼性，以及对难度水平的优化。

如何让清华大学课件更高效地促进教学效果

让清华大学课件更高效地促进教学效果，需要教授们在多方面进行努力，包括修订和完善课件的内容，设计和创新新的传授和评估方法以及教学质量的监督和反馈等方面。

首先，教授们应该精简冗长的课件内容，重点突出，将核心内容优先展示。同时，要做好知识点之间内在联系的表述，强调重点难点链接和详尽解释。

其次，教授们应受重视社交学生之间的相互沟通, 以完善新的传授和评估方法并建立在学生间和教授间的双向沟通和反馈系统，以此并在每一学期调整和优化课堂效果。

最后，教授们应以学生需求为中心，努力锻炼学生的自学和探索能力，在激发学生兴趣的同时，鼓励学生探索新的知识领域和应用方式，不断拓展知识领域和深度。

总结：

从以上讨论可以看出，清华大学课件在不断更新和改进中保持了许多优点，但是它也存在一些缺点和需要改进的地方。对于教授们来说，他们可以从减少冗长、增强可读性和语言表达的精炼性，优化难度水平等方面下手，以更好的方式促进教学效果。同时，现代科技手段和社交媒体已经被广泛应用于教育领域，从而使得清华大学内的课件和教育更加直观、自由、灵活和互动。在未来的教学过程中，学生和教授可以相互协作，充分发挥技术的优势，促进教学环境和质量的不断提高，并且在游戏化教育和人工智能等新技术的帮助下，让清华大学课件不断创新，为学生们提供更加优质的学习体验。

大学库课件【篇9】

教学目标：

能够运用已有的生活经验和学习经验，以自己喜爱的方式表现美妙的清晨，并通过聆听、演唱、表演等多种活动的参与更进一步激起心中对生活的热爱。

教学重点、难点：

1、学生运用已有的生活经验和学习经验，以自己喜爱的方式表现美妙的清晨.

2、通过各种活动的参与进一步激起心中对生活的热爱.

3、指导学生唱准歌曲《清晨》第四段中的大跳音准。

2、出示两幅日出图片。

3、给学生聆听两段不同情绪的音乐，选择哪段音乐与画面更相配。

这首歌曲给你怎样的感觉？你觉得它描绘了一幅怎样的画面？

（1）复听清晨音乐，跟老师做一些简单而又轻松的律动。

（2）跟音乐用“绿”哼唱歌曲旋律。歌曲可以分几个部分？

（3）学生用竖笛自学歌曲的第一部分16个小节的曲调，也可以通过自己视唱来自学。

（4）教师通过范唱和范奏的方法教学歌曲第二部分的曲调，重点指导好第一乐句的大跳音程的音准。

（5）省略第二段，直接将1、3、4段曲调连起来唱。

四、课堂小结。

大学库课件【篇10】

教学目标 1、会认 9 个生字。

2、通过多种形式的读书活动,学生把课文读正确,读流利,读出感情,在读中品味词语,积累语言,有所感悟。

3、培养学生关爱他人、关爱环境、关爱生活的美好愿望,并向往和追求美好的事物。

4、能展开丰富的想象力，根据本文诗句的格式仿写、续写。

重点难点 1、学生能正确流利有感情地朗读课文，并在品读中能激发学生的同情心、爱心，启发学生关爱他人、关爱生活、关爱环境。

2、根据本文诗句的格式仿写、续写自己想说的话，表达自己的情感。

教学过程一、故事导入，情感铺垫 1、孩子们，你们想听神笔马良的故事吗?(播放视频)故事听完了，有谁知道马良的这支笔有什么神奇的地方呀?(指名说) 2、师：你听得真认真!马良啊就用这支神笔帮助了很多很多的人，实现了他心中的愿望。你想有一支这样的神笔吗?(生：想) 3、师：有一个小朋友啊，也想有一支神笔，她要用神笔画什么呢?我们一块来听听。

(出示课件：师读，配音乐) 4、师：孩子们，刚才我读的这篇课文就是今天要共同学习的第 10 课《假如》(板书课题)。

师：一起读读题目(注意读出诗意) 二、自主学习，整体感知 1、师：这篇课文是一首小诗，那么孩子们你们想不想读读这首诗呀?(生：答)想就拿起书，用你喜欢的方式认真地读一读，读的时候要把字音读准确，课文读通顺，开始读吧!读完的小朋友就可以坐好了。

2、师：同学们读得可认真了，不知道上节课所学的词语宝宝你们还认识吗?(生：答)那好，下面请一小组的同学开火车读词语。

(课件展示词语：寒冷袭击觅食哭泣快乐叹息饥饿谷粒双腿不幸) 3、师：同学们的表现可真棒啊!表扬自己!现在请大家认真地看看课文，比较一下这四个小节，看看你有什么发现呢?一个小朋友有发现了，好多个小朋友有发现了，谁愿意来说说。(生：答) 课件展示：假如|我|有一支|马良的|神笔 4、好，我们一起把这句话读一遍。(生齐读)我想问问同学们真的有神笔吗?(生：答)没有，这只不过是我们的一种什么呀?(生：想像)那你有过想像吗?(生：答) 5、那这句话你能不能读得让我们感受到你是在想像着能有一支神笔呀?(生：答)能啊，谁愿意读读。(指名读) 6、好，现在同学们听老师来读读，你觉得哪一种读法更容易把你带入到想像的世界中去，听好了，(第一种，第二种) 7、第二种啊，那跟着老师来读读好不好(指名读)对了，如果在假如的后面稍微停顿一下，让我们觉得好像在思考什么就更好了，再试试吧!(齐读) 三、读悟结合，体验情感 1、那么小作者有了马良的神笔要帮助谁呢?(指名回答) 教师板书：出示图画(神笔，小树，小鸟，西西)

谁能用一句话连起来说一说，小作者用神笔帮助谁，谁，还有谁?(指名回答) 3、说得对，让我们先来看看小作者是怎样帮助小树的吧!(出示第一节) 学习第一节 (1)、谁来读读课文的第一小节。(课件展示第一节内容)孩子们，那你们知道小作者是怎样帮助小树的呢?(板书：太阳云朵)那小作者为什么要给小树画太阳和云朵呢?(用课文的语句回答) (解释：袭击) (2)师：寒冷的冬天来了，大雪纷飞，你觉得小树受到了怎样地袭击呢?(课件展示)(指名回答) (3)(课件展示)孤零零的小树站在外面被北风吹着，被雪花打着，冻得它浑身发抖。孩子们假如你就是这棵小树，你现在的内心有什么感受呀?(指名回答) (4)孩子们你们说的小作者都听到了，所以小作者说(课件出示：我要给窗前----白白的云朵。师指导读这句诗。)好了，有了小作者的帮助，大家快看(出示课件)金色的太阳，白白的云朵，小树呀它得到了温暖。它挺了挺腰，伸了伸胳膊，摆了摆头，多快乐呀! (5)小树变得快乐了，那小作者心情怎样?(很快乐)，我们的心里(也很快乐)就让我们快乐地读读小作者的美好心愿吧!(指名读——齐读) (6)有了小作者的帮助，小树变得快乐了，那么小鸟和西西，小作者又是怎样帮助他们的呢?现在我们来看看课文的第二小节和第三小节，男同学来读第二小节，女同学来读第三小节。(教师指导朗读) 学习第二节：

(1)小作者是怎样帮助小鸟的呢?你们知道吗?(生：谷粒)(课件出示第二节诗) (2)那么小作者为什么要给小鸟画谷粒?用课文中的语句回答(课件出示第二节诗)，(解释：“觅食”) (3)如果现在你就是饿坏了的小鸟，在等妈妈找食回来，你在窝里饿得喳喳地直哭，那你会喳喳地说什么呀?(指名回答) (4)假如我们看到了小鸟，你愿意帮助它吗?愿意关心它吗?请把你对小鸟的爱护和关心读出来吧!(学生推荐读，你们最想谁来读?谁能读得更好呢?(指名读)我们拿起书一快来表达出对小鸟的爱——齐读)(师指导：带着想像的翅膀去读) 学习第三节诗 (1)得到大家的帮助以后，小树和小鸟都变得开心起来，那么小作者又要用神笔给不幸的朋友西西画什么了?(板书：好腿) (2)对呀，西西没有一双健康的好腿，他不能和我们干什么?(一起跑步、一起跳舞、一起做游戏)他只能坐在哪儿?(指导读)哎!他多痛苦呀!可是现在他有了一双好腿，西西可以和我们一起赛跑、可以和我们一起打球，还可以和我们一起干什么? (3)看到西西这么快乐，大家开不开心?(生：开心)好，女生来读读第三小节，表达出对西西的祝福吧!女生读得真有感情，把对西西的祝福融入了朗读中，我看男生们也跃跃欲试了，那你们也带着对西西美好的祝福来试试吧。(课件展示第三小节) 四、自主积累，提升情感 1、小作者真是个有爱心的孩子。她不但给空前的小树画了个金色的太阳，给树上的小鸟画了许多好吃的谷粒，还给西西画了一双好腿。这三个愿望是多么美好啊! 2、小作者的愿望只有这三个吗?(生：答)你从哪里读出来的?课件展示)(感悟文末的省略号)对，小作者还有很多很多的愿望。

3、他没有给自己画漂亮的衣服，也没有给自己画好玩的玩具，而是用神笔帮助我们身边的植物朋友、动物朋友，还有人类朋友。那么小作者觉得快乐吗?(板书：帮助别人就是快乐

自己)假如你也有一支马良的神笔，你要给谁画什么呢?你能用上像我们小作者诗一样的语言来说说吗?把想说的话写下来吧!课件展示：假如我有一支马良的神笔，我要给( )画( )，让( ) 4、你们和小作者一样都是很有爱心的孩子，接下来带着你们的爱，带着你们的祝福，再来读读这首小诗好不好?(学生站起读)老师给你们配上好听的音乐。(齐读) 【结束语】(课件展示)帮助别人就是快乐自己，假如老师有一支马良的神笔，我要给善良的小朋友画一对翅膀，带着你的爱，带着你的情，飞向蔚蓝的天空，飞向地球的每一个角落。

五、作业 1、背诵诗歌。

2、课外阅读儿童诗，准备召开一次诗歌朗诵会。

大学库课件【篇11】

清华大学课件

清华大学是中国著名的高等教育机构，位于北京市海淀区颐和园西北侧，是中国最顶尖的学府之一。清华大学的教育教学质量一直备受社会关注，而清华大学课件是提高教育教学质量的一项重要举措。本文就清华大学课件这一主题进行探讨。

一、清华大学课件的发展历程

清华大学的课件发展可以追溯到上个世纪90年代初期。当时，清华大学电子工程系的教师陆继明博士自行设计开发了一套讲义和实验指导书。这套指导书基于Windows 3.1平台，采用了菜单式界面和图形化操作，可以方便地查看课程内容和实验指导。在陆教授的指导下，电子工程系的多名教职员工开始使用这套课件进行教学。

随着计算机技术的不断发展，课件的功能和界面也得到了不断改进。1997年，清华大学启用了新的教育技术研究中心，为清华大学课件的研发提供了更好的机会和平台。在教育技术研究中心的指导下，清华大学的多名教师和学生开始研发各种课件，如数学、物理、计算机等多个学科。

进入新的千年，伴随着网络技术和移动设备的发展，清华大学课件的发展也进入了一个新的阶段。从2000年代中期开始，清华大学开始使用互联网进行课件教学。同时，清华大学的多名研究人员还开展了基于移动设备的课件研究。

二、清华大学课件的特点

1. 图形化界面设计

清华大学课件的一个显著特点就是优美的图形化界面设计。无论是PPT形式的课件，还是基于互联网的在线课件，都注重色彩搭配、布局合理和美观易用等方面。在这方面，清华大学的设计师们一直领先于其他高校。

2. 多媒体教学形式

清华大学课件采用了多媒体教学形式，涵盖了多种表达方式。除了文字和图表外，音频、动画和视频等多种形式也得到广泛应用。这种以学生为中心的教学方式，可以更加有效地激发学生的学习兴趣，增强学生的理解能力。

3. 互动性强

清华大学课件注重互动性强，学生在学习中可以使用课件的互动功能与教师进行交流。比如，学生可以使用课件的笔记功能随时记录笔记，可以在教师设置的互动页面参与讨论，可以在网上提交作业等。

三、清华大学课件的应用与优势

清华大学课件已经成为这所高校教学中不可或缺的一部分，覆盖了从本科到研究生等多个教学阶段。清华大学的教师利用课件辅助教学，可以更好地满足学生的实际需求，提高课程的针对性和实用性。同时，清华大学课件把多媒体、互动性和智能化技术融为一体，有效地改善了传统的教学模式，提高了学生知识的掌握能力和应用能力。

总之，清华大学课件的发展历史十分悠久，其特点和应用优势也非常显著。随着互联网和移动设备的不断普及，清华大学课件将继续发挥着重要的作用，为高校教育教学提供更加全面、便捷、优质的服务。

大学库课件【篇12】

【学习目标】

1.积累文学常识。

2.理解文意，准确翻译。掌握文中重要的文言词语和特殊句式。

3.分析本文的论证特点。

4.理解文章表达的思想及现实意义。

【重点难点】

重点：目标1、2、3

难点：目标3、4

【课时数】一课时

【教学过程】

一、导入

“修身、齐家、治国、平天下”，是中国古代圣贤智慧的结晶，那古代中国人到底是如何连接自我、家族、民族、国家和天下观念的呢？今天我们学习选自《礼记大学》的一段文字，感受古代圣贤的智慧。

二、题解

“大学之道”，意思是大学的宗旨，大学的最终目的。“大学”，在古代指与“小学”相对的“大人之学”。古代儿童八岁上小学，主要学习“洒扫、应对、进退、礼乐射御书数”之类的文化课和基本的礼节。十五岁后可进入大学，开始学习伦理、政治、哲学等“穷理正心，修己治人”的学问。道：本指道路，在这里指的是在学习政治、哲学时所掌握的规律和原则。

三、文学常识

1.《礼记》又名《小戴礼记》、《小戴记》，成书于汉代，为西汉礼学家戴圣所编。《礼记》是中国古代一部重要的典章制度选集，书中内容主要写先秦的礼制，体现了先秦儒家的哲学思想（如天道观、宇宙观、人生观）、教育思想（如个人修身、教育制度、教学方法、学校管理）、政治思想（如以教化政、大同社会、礼制与刑律）、美学思想（如物动心感说、礼乐中和说），是研究先秦社会的重要资料，是一部儒家思想的资料汇编。

2.《大学之道》出自《礼记》，是《礼记》四十九篇中的第四十二篇。宋代以前，《大学》一直从属于《礼记》。朱熹将《大学》从《礼记》中抽取出来，为《大学》《中庸》做章句，为《论语》《孟子》做集注，把它们编在一起，做《四书章句集注》，经此，《大学》与《中庸》《论语》《孟子》合称为“四书”，并被确立“四书之首”的地位。

四、研习文本。

（一）自主学习

请借助注释及工具书，自主翻译文章，在课本上标注重要词语。并记下疑难问题。

指导学生重点学习以下词语：

1.道：本指道路，在这里指的是在学习政治、哲学时所掌握的规律和原则。

2.明明德：第一个“明”是动词，彰显、发扬之意。第二个“明”是形容词，含有高尚、光辉的意思。

3.亲民：亲近。一说是“新民”，使人弃旧因新，弃恶扬善。

4.止：至，到。

5.知止：知道目标所在。

6.静：心不妄动。

7.安：所处而安，性情安和。

8.虑：思虑精详。

9.得：处事全宜。

10.齐其家：使家族中的各种关系整齐有序。人与人之间的关系和谐，家业繁荣。

11.修其身：修养自己的德行。

12.致其知：获得知识。一说，把自己对事物的认识推到极致。

13.格物：推究事物的原理。

14.庶人：普通百姓。

15.壹是皆以修身为本：壹是：一律，一概。本：本源、根本。

（二）合作解疑

1.在小组内交流展示学习成果，以句为单位，口头翻译，每人主讲一句。

2.针对自主学习过程中遇到的疑难，讨论探究，尝试解决。

【参考译文】

《大学》的宗旨，在于彰明美好的德行，在于亲近爱抚民众，在于使人达到完善的境界。知道要达到的“至善”境界，则志向坚定不移；志向坚定，方能心不妄动；心地不妄动，则性情安和；性情安和，则思虑精详，思虑精详则处事合宜。凡物都有根本有末节，凡事都有终结有开始，明白了本末始终的先后顺序，就接近《大学》的道理了。

古代那些想在天下彰明美好的德行的人，先要治理好自己的国家。要想治理好自己国家的人，先要管理好自己的家庭；要想管理好自己家庭的人，先要修养好自身的德行；要想修养好自身德行的人，先要端正自己的心意；要想端正自己心意的人，先要使自己的心意真诚；要想使自己心意真诚的人，先要使自己获取知识；获取知识的途径在于推究事物的原理。明白了事物的原理后才能对外物的事理认识充分，对外物的事理认识充分后才能心意真诚，心意真诚后才能心思端正，心思端正后才能修养好德行，德行修养好后才能管理好家庭，家庭管理好后才能治理好国家，国家治理好后天下才能太平。从天子到普通百姓，都要把修养德行作为根本。

（三）全员解疑

由各小组提出疑问，全班同学和老师一起解决问题。

以交流解疑巩固学习成果。

五、探究思考

（一）第一段重点写了什么内容？

指出大学的宗旨，提出了大学的“三纲”：明明德、亲民、止于至善。

首先，《大学》对儒学作了一个高度概括，提出“明明德，在亲民，在止于至善”三项，即宋代儒家们所说的大学“三纲领”。这一概括非常准确地揭示了儒学的基本精神，也道出了《大学》的主旨。《大学》是讲治国平天下的学问，但是它按照孔子思想，不就事论事，而是将人的精神的弘扬和品德修养置于首位。“明明德”是发扬自己固有的德性，是激发求学者完善自己的自觉性，而不是用某种外在的、固定的道德准则束缚自己。“亲民”即“新民”，就是不仅自觉地进行自我修养，而且努力提高全体人民的道德品质，在儒家看来这是为治国平天下的伟业奠定精神基础。“止于至善”就是要将自己的道德品质和社会、国家的治理提升到最完美的地步，不达到最理想的境界绝不停止，实际上是一个无限的完善过程。

明明德、亲民、止于至善，既是《大学》的纲领旨趣，也是儒学“垂世立教”的目标所在。

（二）第一段的三句话之间是什么关系？

首句开宗明义，提出大学之道的“三纲”，第二、三句承接上文对如何达到大学之道，阐明其中的逻辑关系，为下文引出八条目做准备。

（三）第二段重点写了“八目”，包括哪些内容？

第二段提出“八目”：格物、致知、诚意、正心、修身、齐家、治国、平天下。

（四）“八目”之间是什么关系？

“格物、致知”为第一步，对应的是知的功夫；“诚意、正心、修身”为第二步，对应的是修的功夫；“齐家、治国、平天下”是第三步，对应的是用的功夫。“格物、致知、诚意、正心、修身”是修己，“齐有、治国、平天下”是安人。

（五）“三纲”“八目”之间的关系是怎样的？

“三纲”是宗旨，是纲领，是指导思想，“八目”是实现“三纲”的具体步骤。它们是一个不可分割的整体。

（六）请简要分析本文的论证特点

1.论证结构严谨，条理清晰。先提出表明宗旨的“三纲”，然后提出实现“三纲”的具体步骤，说明治国平天下和个人道德修养的一致性。浑然一体，结构严谨，条理清晰。

2.运用排比、顶真手法，论证力强。句式整齐，节奏分明，增强了语势，具有无可辩驳的力量。

六、诵读，加深理解。

七、小结。

《大学之道》提出“三纲”“八目”，强调修身是根本，修身的目的是治国平天下，说明治国平天下和个人修养的一致性。

通过学习，我们可以得知，在长期占据中国封建统治思想主导地位的儒家文化中，修身、齐家、治国、平天下乃文人志士之所向往，个人、家族、民族、国家、天下联系密切。“爱人者，人恒爱之；敬人者，人恒敬之。”不歧视他人，人不与之立异。在古代中国人看来，个人、家族、民族、国家、天下并无具体刻意化分割，因而得以连接。

八、布置作业

1.拓展阅读《礼记》部分章节，积累名句。

2.思考：当今社会，我们如何借鉴学习“八目”的内容？

大学库课件【篇13】

(4)按照教材教法要求撰写，条理清晰，书写工整，内容包括教学目标，重难点，教学准备，教学过程，作业要求及板书设计等，力求体现教学形象性，直观性和实践性。

知识与技能：了解日用产品设计的基础知识，知道从日用产品的造型、色彩、材质、功能四个方面加以分析，形成初步的设计意识。

过程与方法：欣赏优秀的日用产品设计作品，了解产品设计的主要特征，尝试用语言或文字从设计的角度进行评述，分析产品设计的成功与不足之处，尝试进行多种形式的设计和制作练习。

情感态度价值观：有学习愿望，能积极思考，具有求新求变的能力。

学会从功能、材质、造型、色彩四个方面欣赏、评述日用产品。

激发学生的学习热情，培养学生的设计思维与审美能力。

多媒体课件、教科书，新颖奇特的日用品;

教师展示切苹果的神器，让学生猜这有什么好处?学生猜，讨论。从而引指出我们的生活离不开设计，引出今天的课题《美观又实用的日用产品》

生活中处处有设计，处处有奇思妙想，请同学们欣赏一组德国厨房里工具的巧妙设计的图片。

提问：这样的设计有哪些优点?哪些不足?你觉得怎样设计才能更完美。并要求学生欣赏图片并以小组的形式进行讨论，选出一名代表进行发言。

学生回答，教师总结并予以肯定(例如：德国厨房中的厨具都体现了“以人为本”的设计理念，在注重实用的同时，更人性化，用起来更贴心。青花瓷盘在考虑到实用的基础上，把全世界闻名的青花瓷以最美的感受展示给大家，给人以美的享受。)

教师：中国是四大文明古国之一，古代人的聪明才智在当时是世界领先的，看看古代哪些生活用品中充满了无穷的智慧。例如：红漆花形洗子，你能看出它造型上的优美和实用性吗?

学生回答，教师总结并予以肯定(漆型洗子是利用自然界的花瓣的形状作为创作的原型，利用中国红在色彩上很鲜艳，非常美观。)

教师提问：通过欣赏古今中外优秀的生活用品，设想一下，如果你是设计师，你会考虑哪几方面进行设计?

学生回答，教师总结(首先要有实用性，其次要有艺术性，二者相结合就是最佳设计)

教师通过播放多媒体视屏的方式让同学感受旧物改造的好处以及方式方法。并讲解注意事项。

布置任务：设计作品可以在造型、色彩、及实用性上多加考虑，设计体现个性的出独一无二的作品。用我们学过的或自己喜欢的方法创作。

(教师巡视指导过程中针对共同存在的问题，及时指出，及时纠正。表扬有创意的作品;对个别学生进行技法指导。)

同学们一小组的形式派出代表发言，评价主要围绕着造型色彩和实用性展开。

教师向学生推荐一下中央二台的《交换空间》这个栏目，里面有许多设计师将他们优秀的设计，展示给我们，有时间的时候大家可以借鉴学习一下，你会变得更加智慧。我们的生活中处处有创意设计，我们离不开设计，同学们让我们都打开脑洞，把身边已经过时的生活用品来一次大改造，或者作为设计者，有更多更好的发明设计出现在我们班的同学中，为生活服务、装点生活。

大学库课件【篇14】

【学习目标】

1、积累文学常识。

2、掌握文中重要的文言词语和特殊句式，理解文意，准确翻译。

3、理解“三纲”“八目”的具体所指及其内部关联。

【重点难点】

1、掌握文中重要的文言词语和特殊句式。

2、理解“三纲”“八目”的具体所指及其内部关联。

【课时数】两课时

【教学过程】

一、题解

“大学之道”，意思是大学的宗旨，大学的最终目的。

“大学”一词在古代有两种含义：一是“博学”的意思；二是相对于小学而言的“大人之学”。

古人八岁入小学，学习“洒扫应对进退、礼乐射御书数”等文化基础知识和礼节；十五岁入大学，学习伦理、政治、哲学等学问。第二种含义同样也有“博学”的意思。

二、文学常识

《礼记》，成书于汉代，为西汉礼学家戴圣所编。《礼记》是中国古代一部重要的典章制度选集，书中内容主要写先秦的礼制，是一部儒家思想的资料汇编。

《大学之道》出自《礼记》。宋代以前，《大学》一直从属于《礼记》。《大学》与《中庸》《论语》《孟子》合称为“四书”，并被确立“四书之首”的地位。

三、研习文本

（一）自主学习

大学之道，在明明德，在亲民，在止于至善。知止而后有定，定而后能静，静而后能安，安而后能虑，虑而后能得。物有本末，事有终始，知所先后，则近道矣。

[注释]

1、道：本指道路，在这里指的是在学习政治、哲学时所掌握的规律和原则。

2、明明德：第一个“明”是动词，彰明、彰显。第二个“明”是形容词，美好。

3、亲民：亲近爱抚民众。一说是“新民”，使人去旧立新，去恶向善。

4、止：至、到。

5、知止：知道目标所在，知道要达到的“至善”境界。

6、静：心不妄动。

7、安：性情安和。

8、虑：思虑精详。

9、得：处事合宜。

[译文]

大学的宗旨，在于彰明美好的德行，在于亲近爱抚民众，在于达到道德修养的最高境界。知道要达到的“至善”境界，则志向坚定不移；志向坚定，方能心不妄动；心不妄动，则性情安和；性情安和，则思虑精详；思虑精详，则处事合宜。凡物都有根本有末节，凡事都有终结有开始，明白了本末始终的先后顺序，就接近《大学》的道理了（也译为“就接近了事物发展的规律”）。

本

指事字，从木，“一”标明树根。

《说文解字》：“本，木下曰本”。

草木的根——根本、根源——本来、本意——本钱——自己方面的。

君子务本，本立而道生。（根本、根源）

本厂、本国（自己方面的）

末

指事字，从木，从一。木指一棵树，上面一横表示树梢所在的位置。

《说文解字》：“末，木上曰末。”

树梢——微小的、不重要的（树梢细微）——粉末——末端（树梢在顶端）——末尾（时间上在后的）

本末倒置（树梢）

细枝末节（微小的、不重要的）

强弩之末（末尾）

古之欲明明德于天下者，先治其国。欲治其国者，先齐其家。欲齐其家者，先修其身。欲修其身者，先正其心。欲正其心者，先诚其意。欲诚其意者，先致其知。致知在格物。物格而后知至，知至而后意诚，意诚而后心正，心正而后身修，身修而后家齐，家齐而后国治，国治而后天下平。自天子以至于庶人，壹是皆以修身为本。

[注释]

1、齐其家：使家族中的各种关系整齐有序，人与人之间的关系和谐，家业繁荣。

齐，使……整齐有序。

2、修其身：修养自己的德行。

3、正：使……端正。

4、诚：使……真诚。意：心意。

5、致其知：获得知识。一说，把自己对事物的认识推到极致。

6、格物：推究事物的原理。格：推究。

7、庶人：普通百姓。

8、壹是：一律，一概。本：本源、根本。

[译文]

古代那些想在天下彰明美好的德行的人，先要治理好自己的国家。要想治理好自己国家的人，先要使家族中的各种关系整齐有序。要想使家族中的各种关系整齐有序的人，先要修养好自身的德行。要想修养好自身德行的人，先要端正自己的心意。要想端正自己心意的人，先要使自己的心意真诚。要想使自己心意真诚的人，先要获取知识。获取知识的途径在于推究事物的原理。事物的原理推究明白后才能对外物的事理认识充分，对外物的事理认识充分后才能心意真诚，心意真诚后才能心思端正，心思端正后才能修养好德行，德行修养好后才能使家族中的各种关系整齐有序，使家族中的各种关系整齐有序后才能治理好国家，国家治理好后天下才能太平。从天子到普通百姓，一律要把修养德行作为根本。

致

送达、送到：致电、致意。

获得、招致、使到来（使动）：致知在格物。

集中（由招致引申）：专心致志。

意态、情趣：情致。

四、解读“三纲”“八目”

（一）三纲

1、何为“三纲”

提出了大学的“三纲”：明明德、亲民、止于至善。

《大学》对儒学作了一个高度概括，提出“明明德，在亲民，在止于至善”三项，即宋代儒家们所说的大学“三纲领”。

“明明德”是发扬自己固有的德性，是激发求学者完善自己的自觉性。

“亲民”，就是不仅自觉地进行自我修养，而且努力使自己的修养作用于民众，在儒家看来这是为治国平天下的伟业奠定精神基础。

“止于至善”就是要将自己的道德品质和社会、国家的治理提升到最完美的地步，不达到最理想的境界绝不停止，实际上是一个无限的完善过程。

2、“三纲”之间的关系

首句开宗明义，提出大学之道的“三纲”，第二、三句承接上文对如何达到大学之道，阐明其中的逻辑关系，为下文引出八条目做准备。

明明德完善自我，改进自我对己立德止于至善

亲民爱民顺民，引导百姓自我完善对人爱人

（二）八目

1、何为“八目”

第二段提出“八目”：格物、致知、诚意、正心、修身、齐家、治国、平天下。

2、“八目”之间的关系

“格物、致知”为第一步，对应的.是“知”；“诚意、正心、修身”为第二步，对应的是“修”；“齐家、治国、平天下”是第三步，对应的是“用”。“格物、致知、诚意、正心、修身”是修己，“齐有、治国、平天下”是安人。

格物、致知知内修修己独善其身修身立德

诚意、正心、修身修

齐家、治国、平天下用外治安人兼善天下致用亲民

（三）“三纲”“八目”之间的关系是怎样的？

“三纲”是宗旨，是纲领，是指导思想，“八目”是实现“三纲”的具体步骤。它们是一个不可分割的整体。

补充资料：

樊迟问仁。子曰：“爱人。”《颜渊》

孟子曰：“君子之于物也，爱之而弗仁；于民也，仁之而弗亲。亲亲而仁民，仁民而爱物。”

[解析]

孟子说：“君子对于万物，爱惜它，但谈不上仁爱；对于百姓，仁爱，但谈不上亲爱。亲爱亲人而仁爱百姓，仁爱百姓而爱惜万物。”

孟子说出了爱的层次。

对于物，主要是爱惜。爱惜的具体表现，就是要“取之有时，用之有节。”这种思想与今天保护环境，珍惜自然资源的意识一致。（物指禽兽草木）

对于民，也就是老百姓，需要仁爱。仁爱的具体表现，就是“老吾老以及人之老，幼吾幼以及人之幼”，是推己及人的仁爱。

对于亲，也就是自己的亲人，是一种以血缘关系为纽带的亲爱，是爱之中最自然的一个层次。

只有能够亲爱亲人，才有可能推己及人地去仁爱百姓；只有能够仁爱百姓时，才有可能爱惜万物。

爱虽然有亲疏，有差等，但这些亲疏差等之间却又有着内在的必然的联系。

从亲爱自己的亲人出发，推向仁爱百姓，再推向爱惜万物，这就形成了儒学的“爱的系列”，这个系列和《大学》“修身、齐家、治国、平天下”阶梯相统一的。

“让世界充满爱”，应该充满各种各样的爱。

五、请简要分析本文的论证特点

1、论证结构严谨，条理清晰。先提出表明宗旨的“三纲”，然后提出实现“三纲”的具体步骤，说明治国平天下和个人道德修养的一致性。浑然一体，结构严谨，条理清晰。

2、运用排比、顶真手法，论证力强。句式整齐，节奏分明，增强了语势，具有无可辩驳的力量。

六、小结

《大学之道》提出“三纲”“八目”，强调修身是根本，修身的目的是治国平天下，说明治国平天下和个人修养的一致性。

通过学习，我们可以得知，在长期占据中国封建统治思想主导地位的儒家文化中，修身、齐家、治国、平天下乃文人志士之所向往，个人、家族、民族、国家、天下联系密切。在古代中国人看来，个人、家族、民族、国家、天下并无具体刻意化分割，因而得以连接。

七、布置作业

思考：当今社会，我们如何借鉴学习“八目”的内容？

八、课后学情调研

（一）填空

《礼记》是儒家思想的资料汇编。《四书》指的是《大学》、《中庸》、《论语》、《孟子》。

（二）解释下列句子中加点词语的意思，有词类活用的要说明活用情况

1、在明（形作动，彰明）明（美好的）德

2、在止于至善（达到道德修养的最高境界）

3、知止而后有定（动作名，坚定的志向）

4、欲治其国者，先齐其家（形作使动，使整齐有序）

5、欲诚其意者，先致其知（获取）

6、致知在格（推究）物

7、家齐而后国治（治理得好）

8、壹是（一律）皆以修身为本一概

（三）翻译下列句子

1、大学之道，在明明德，在亲民，在止于至善。

译文：大学的宗旨，在于彰明美好的德行，在于亲近爱抚民众，在于达到道德修养的最高境界。

2、知止而后有定，定而后能静。

译文：知道要达到的“至善”境界，则志向坚定不移；志向坚定，方能心不妄动。

3、古之欲明明德于天下者，先治其国。

译文：古代那些想在天下彰明美好的德行的人，先要治理好自己的国家。

4、欲诚其意者，先致其知。致知在格物。

译文：要想使自己心意真诚的人，先要获取知识。获取知识的途径在于推究事物的原理。

5、自天子以至于庶人，壹是皆以修身为本。

译文：从天子到普通百姓，一律要把修养德行作为根本。

大学库课件【篇15】

主题：如何提高英语听力能力

英语是一门全球通用的语言，许多人学习英语的目的是为了迎合社会发展的趋势，或是为了国外留学、工作等目的。而英语听力能力是提高英语听说读写能力的重要基础，因此如何有效地提高英语听力能力成为了许多学习者所关注和探讨的话题。

首先，对于初学者而言，建议从日常生活中入手，比如在听英语歌曲、看英语电影、听英语广播等方面自己尝试去听，这有助于从交际上了解语言的使用环境，提高听力的识别能力。此外，在学习过程中多和外教或讲得不错的同学交流，不但能够加深自己的印象，还能练习自己的英语口语能力。

其次，建议学习者进一步提高自己的听力能力，在听教材内容时，可以通过一些小技巧来辅助学习，在深刻理解听力原文内容的基础上，不妨在听的过程中注意一些关键词或核心内容，将这些信息暂时记下，等到听完整个篇章后再进行整理和比对，有助于提高听力的准确度、流畅度。

第三，可以通过多种科技手段来提高听力能力，如近年来尤其流行的听力app或在线听力文章，通过练习、模拟各种听力情境，不断提升听力难度，从而起到系统、全面提高听力的效果。同时，也可以自己录制一些英文文章，用来练习自己的英文听力和口语能力。

总之，提高英语听力能力对于英语学习者来说非常重要，只要持之以恒地进行听力练习，掌握好听笔记的方法，这些都可以帮助学习者在日常使用英语时更加流利、自如地运用语言，从而有效地提高英语水平和英语语感。

dg15.com小编推荐

2023桂花雨课件(精品十五篇)

本文将为大家介绍一些关于“桂花雨课件”的相关资料，请务必仔细阅读以下内容。在上课之前，老师需要准备教案和课件，只要在上课前将教案和课件准备好即可。新教师需要投入更多的时间和精力来完善教案和课件。

桂花雨课件(篇1)

各位领导、各位同仁，大家好！

现在，就我听《桂花雨》一课的粗浅感受，向大家作以汇报，如有不到之处敬请指正。

《桂花雨》是现当代女作家琦君的名作。它主要以桂花香为线索，写了我童年时代的摇花乐，表达了对家乡亲人和美好生活的眷恋。她的这篇文章非常优美，使人读后真的象浸润在一场香香的桂花雨中。在那浓郁而迷人的香气中，感受着琦君那如雨般的思乡之情。

虽然文章四溢琦君的这份浓浓的思乡之情，不读就无法理解其中丰富的意蕴，不读就未能感受文中那浓浓的情感。因此，项老师在这堂课上以读代讲，以读促情的做法，是非常成功的。

一、抓文本用心读

课文的理解靠读，字词的掌握靠读，语感的领会靠读，主题的把握靠读，学生感情的融入也要靠读。好的朗读胜过繁琐的讲解。

朱熹曾说：读得熟，则不待解说，自晓其义也。他充分肯定了在语文学习中读是一个不可替代的手段。

提高读的质量很重要。读得再多，没有质量的保证，也难以真正提高课堂效益。

整堂课的教学活动中，教师让学生自己去读，自己去接触范文，仔细揣摩，反复体味，内心融入。

1、第一要求学生做到三到：眼到、口到、心到，用心去读；

2、第二让学生带着问题去读，做到每读一段都要有目的，不白读；

3、第三选好读的重点，一篇课文不能平均使用力量，必须选择有助于进行词句训练的、有助于挖掘文章主题的、有利于体会作者思想感情的内容作为重点来读。

项老师注重通过多种方法指导学生进行朗读。通过默读、自由读、引读、范读、配乐读、师生、生生互读等方式提高学生朗读能力。学生将课文读得充分、读得精彩，读出了课文要表达的感情，也读出了自己的真情实感。由品赏朗读到领悟情感自然水到渠成。

二、在理解中美读

叶圣陶先生说：语文课目的之一，是使学生在阅读的时候能够自求了解，了解不了才给学生帮助一下，困惑得解，事半功倍。

在课堂上，要想吸收和积累生动的语言，就要引导学生深入文本，抓住课文中的一些重点词、重点句让学生展开想象，体会作者的思想感情，读出味来。

1、

作者为什么喜欢桂花？老师让学生细读课文一、二段，从中找出重点的语句：桂花树不象梅花那么有姿态，笨笨拙拙的。......桂花不与繁花斗艳，可是它的香气味儿真是迷人。桂花开的最茂盛时，不说香飘十里，至少前后左右十几家邻居，没有不浸在桂花香里的。......

教师引导学生扣住关键词体会桂花姿态的特点：笨笨拙拙。香气迷人的特点：香飘十里、浸等。在对浸字的理解上，先让学生说出浸有浸泡、沉浸的意思，接着教者用语言引导学生想象桂花的香气：不论走到哪里，都会闻到它的香味，房前、屋后；白天干活，晚上睡觉，香气无处不在，无处不有。

学生通过再次读文，从文句中品味出：桂花树笨笨拙拙的，桂花很平凡也很朴素，可是它的香气味儿真是迷人。

不仅作者喜爱桂花，就连古人也很喜欢桂花呢！教师出示古人描写桂花的诗句：叶密千层秀，花开万点金何须浅碧深红色，自是花中高一流。诗句对桂花的形态、特点进行了恰当的描绘和解读。学生通过与文中的语句进行进一步的对照，既理解了诗意，又把作者对桂花与众不同特点的喜爱之情体会的更深刻。这样再回头去读课文，读的更加有味了。

2、课文三节第一句：

摇桂花对我是件大事，所以老是缠着母亲问妈，怎么还不摇桂花嘛！一个缠字写出了作者盼望摇桂花时的迫切心情，同时把儿童对大人的纠缠耍赖的特点表现出来。学生读文后，师问老是缠着是什么样的心情？学生：期待的心情、希望的心情、迫切心情。......然后；老师让学生试着练习读，把这种心情读出来。接着指名学生读，学生在理解的基础上读的比较到位。教师接着让学生想象自己迫切要求妈妈同意自己做某件事时的心情，然后再练读，再指名读，这时把作者当时的心情已经淋漓尽致地读出来了。

这样的教学设计，有效地落实了中年级阅读教学中引导学生体会关键词句在表情达意中的作用这一训练要求。

三、在感悟中读美

1、

课文的第三小节，教师先让学生读课文，找出可以体现出作者摇花时快乐心情的词句：这下我可乐了，帮着在桂花树下铺竹席，帮着抱桂花树使劲地摇。桂花纷纷落下来，落得我们满头满身，我就喊：啊！真象下雨！好香的雨呀！

①理解这下，我可乐了，帮大人抱着桂花树，使劲地摇。[

自己盼望已久的事情发生了，应当是怎样的心情呢？教师让学生带这乐的心情读文，学生乐的心情体现的不充分，从使劲也可以看出作者的乐。让学生读，再读。

②桂花纷纷落下来，落得我们满头满身，我就喊：啊！真象下雨！好香的雨呀！想象桂花纷纷落下来，我们满头满身都是桂花。的情景。

《语文课程标准》指出：在发展语言能力的同时，要发展思维能力，激发想像力和创造潜能。

师：落下的桂花象什么？

生：象......象......象......

教师用柔美的语调描绘美丽的雨景，在再现的情景中唤起学生充满诗意的想象，引起心灵和感情的共鸣。

师：为什么说桂花纷纷落下来的情景真像下雨，而且是好香的雨？

老师再让学生读句子，然后结合文字的描述引导学生想象当时的情景。学生都有淋雨的经历，让学生想象雨飘落在头发、脖颈的情景。

师：现在是有着浓郁香气的桂花也在飘落，落在发梢，落在脖颈，这雨是怎样的雨？

生：好香的雨、金色的雨、快乐的雨......

《语文课程标准》指出：语文课程还应重视提高学生的品德修养和审美情趣......

带着这种感情，教师又让学生深入读文，喊出快乐，喊出桂花的香

（教师这样处理就较好的挖掘了教材中培养学生想象力的训练点，放飞了学生想象的翅膀，进行语言实践，学生在课本里翱翔，文本语言就活了起来。）

纷纷扬扬飘落的桂花雨，具有诗情画意。接着

师：如果是你，你会怎么喊呢？

生：高兴、快乐、大声、兴奋......

教师再让学生回到文本，自读自悟享受桂花的芬芳，感受作者摇桂花的欢乐和兴奋，觉得很是开心，和作者同摇同乐。教师更深一步问

师：作者是用什么方式表达自己的情感？

生：三个！

学生再回到课文时，放得开，喊得入情，做得自然。

学生的头脑不是一个被填满的容器，而是需被点燃的火把。教师的责任就是点燃火把。这个火把已经被老师点燃，最后连老师也被感染了，忍不住和学生一起喊，一起读。

再让学生整段朗读，整体感悟。学生在朗读中理解、体验、积累和感悟。只有有所思，有所想，有所悟，有所感，才能言为心声而发，也才能最终打动人心。由读美而到美读。[

语文教材中集纳了古今中外的众多名篇美文，要想让这些文章打动孩子们的心，就须先打动教师自己的心，与作者同悲同喜，这就靠教师感激昂得导读或使学生精神振奋；或使学生悄然泪下。

2、理解：母亲常常说：外地的桂花再香，还是比不得家乡旧宅院子里的金桂。时，老师让学生在读中体会，母亲说：这里的桂花再香，也比不上家乡院子里的桂花。同是桂花，难道在不同的地方香味就不一样吗？为什么？

母亲这句朴素的话，与月是故乡明如出一辙。荨茱鲈鱼长入梦，他乡虽好总添愁。

母亲每年都闻着桂花的香气，关注桂花，收获桂花，体验着馈赠桂花的快乐，吃着桂花做的食品，喝着桂花茶。桂花，已充盈她生活的全部空间。家乡院子里的这棵桂花树，是母亲生活乃至生命的一部分，还会有什么可以替代它呢？桂花是没有区别的，问题是母亲不是在用嗅觉区分桂花，而是用情感在体味它们。一亲一疏，感觉自然就泾渭分明了。从中，我们不难看出，家乡在母亲心中的分量。感人心者，莫善于情（白居易语）

学生再去读母亲的话，以及5、6段自然会带着深深地情感。

这一部分的教学设计，还体现了引导学生自主阅读文本，感悟文本内容，尊重学生独特的体验这一教学理念，尤其可贵的是，教者在引导学生读书的时候，适时点拨，注重读书方法的指导。

如今，我们的课堂越来越重视朗读，但课堂上反反复复机械式的朗读，往往使学生觉得索然无味，从而产生厌倦情绪。如何牢牢地抓住读这个根本，让学生充分地读，在读中整体感知，在读中有所感悟，在读中培养语感，在读中受到熏陶。项老师的这节课，使我受益非浅。

桂花雨课件(篇2)

【教学目标】

1．正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。想象文中描写的情景，感受作者童年时代的“摇花乐”。

2．引导学生读课文，从读中感受作者童年时代的“摇花乐”。注重学生的探究式学习，体会思乡情。

3．理解文中母亲说的“这里的桂花再香，也比不上家乡院子里的桂花。”这句话，体会作者表达的“思乡情”。

【教学过程】

一．欣赏桂花，谈话导入

1．同学们，刚才我们看到的是什么花？每当中秋节前后，就是桂花盛开的季节。那你喜欢桂花吗？能说说理由吗？前段时间，我们学校里也开满了桂花，整个校园沉浸在花香里。

2．那你听说过桂花雨吗？今天老师要带着大家一起走进台湾女作家琦君的童年，去感受这场奇妙的雨——《桂花雨》板书。

3．齐读课题。试提疑问。

二．整体感知，浸润花香

1．请你自由读课文，思考：课文的作者为什么也喜欢桂花。

2．找出描写桂花香的句子。

A．可是桂花的香气，太迷人了。

B．桂花盛开的时候，不说香飘十里，至少前后十几家邻居，没有不浸在桂花香里的。

C．我喊着：“啊！真像下雨，好香的雨啊！”

D．全年，整个村子都浸在桂花的香气里。

3．每个句子读两遍，体会一下哪一个句子最让我们感受到：家乡院子里的桂花香。

齐读（“全年，整个村子都浸在桂花的香气里”）读这一句时，哪个词冒出来，给你留下深刻印象。

三．透过花香，体悟思乡

1．桂花扑鼻的香气确实令人难忘，除此之外呢？还有什么让作者难以忘怀的呢？抽读５自然段。（对我来说，什么才是大事？）

2．这段话让我们也见识了桂花雨，这里的桂花除了“香”，还有什么？

3．自读，哪一个句子让你有特别的感受。

4．“摇呀摇”我们再来体会这三个字：

5．琦君家的桂花栽满院子，她一个人是摇不过来的，让我们一起帮她“摇呀摇”你们摇出了什么？（童年的乐趣；桂花的香气；童真；乐趣……）

6．摇桂花的快乐也带来了丰收的喜悦，作者的父亲曾经用诗句淋漓尽致地演绎了这份乐，这份喜。请你读读这首诗：（指名读。）

细细香风淡淡烟，

竞收桂子庆丰年。

儿童解得摇花乐，

花雨缤纷入梦甜。

7．伴随着年龄的成长，作者不得不离开家乡到杭州去读中学了。（学习第七自然段）

回家时，总要捧一大袋桂花给母亲，可是母亲说：“这里的桂花再香，也比不上家乡院子里的桂花。”你现在知道母亲为什么这样说了吗？

师：故乡的桂花雨，给大家带来了快乐，是母亲珍爱的。现在，我们来到了作者母亲的身边，假如，我对她说：

（1）这里的水真甜，她会说：

（2）这里的橘子真红，她会说：

（3）这里的人真好，她会说：

（4）十多年后，作者来到了国外定居，她打电话给母亲说：“国外的生活真好呀！”，母亲一定会说：

师小结：再甜不如家乡水，再浓不如家乡情，再好不如家乡人，再香不如家乡桂。

8．整体朗读课文，再次感受桂花雨。

9．乡情难忘，童年难忘，那一场美丽的桂花雨飘落在我们的心间。

四．拓展延伸，爱上阅读

1．作者琦君在她的许多作品中记叙了童年故乡的人和事。在另一部作品《烟愁》里有这样一段后记（教师朗读）：每回我写到我的父母家人与师友，我都禁不住热泪盈眶，我忘不了他们对我的关爱，我也珍惜自己对他们的一份情，象花木草树似的，谁能没有根呢？我常常想，我若能忘掉亲人师友，忘掉童年，忘掉故乡，我若能不再哭，我宁愿搁下笔，此生永不再写，然而，这怎么可能呢？从段话中你觉得作者是一个怎样的人呢？（热爱家乡、重视感情）

2．最后，老师向大家推荐几本书，都是作者回忆童年生活，抒发对故乡的怀念之情的。琦君的散文集《桂花雨》，鲁迅的《朝花夕拾》,林海音的《城南旧事》愿你们在这浓浓的书香中也能找到一份童年的快乐。

桂花雨课件(篇3)

细赏琦君及其作品《桂花雨》

不经意中看了电视剧《橘子红了》。于是让我感受了台湾女作家琦君的写作风格。她的文笔应是属于我欣赏的那种：淡淡的愁绪，温馨中透着幽思，似一缕春风隐约可现。笔调淡雅的琦君是集散文，小说，词人，学者一身的人气很旺的女作家之一。她的小说和散文在不同时段我们都能看到她怀旧，念旧的情怀。读书时期看过那时很红火的作家林海音写的《城南旧事》，与琦君笔下的作品有着异曲同共之处。也许，女作家的创作基调大多有着怀旧，思乡的风格。

《桂花雨》经编者做了改动后成为了一篇很有风格的学生学习的作品。我初读《桂花雨》是在我儿子的语文书本上。因为是孩童的书本赏析作品，内容很单薄，内涵略微浅显了。但其中琦君的文风依旧，简洁，纯朴，淡雅。在素淡的笔调中会带给我们一份心灵的空间，让我们又重拾起童年美好的记忆。那些迷人的小山坡，那些落英缤份的桂花雨。。。。。。

琦君的《桂花雨》中描述了桂花的外表淡雅，也不为人注意，然在她的笔下，给人感觉是迷人的，香飘十里写出了香溢全文而不浓烈。真可谓淡淡花香，幽幽书香。每当桂花盛开，满树生香，花香随风飘飘，弥漫四方。作者其目的在于把桂花香沁入整个小山村，让人们都沉浸在花香的生活里。香远家乡，弥而不散，这魂牵梦萦的花香早已铭刻在作者深深的记忆中了。

琦君在描绘桂花香的同时也把悠远的回忆写了进去。那份幼年的童真，真切而写实。香甜的桂花雨浸润了她的童年回忆。心头淡淡的花香，帮大人摇花的怀念，都随着一幕幕的影像而展开。确实童年的欢笑对作者而言已在梦中，那些无比的快乐，那种动容的喜悦在她的笔下栩栩如生，依然清新自然。

作者在文章中提起母亲，字里行间流淌出对母亲的热爱。由于母亲的关注，她才每次感受到了收获桂花雨的激动，有了母亲的理解，她才品尝了桂花雨的香甜。体验了一份桂花的欢乐。多少年逝去，世事变迁，琦君早已告别母亲，远离故土，然而，她依然牢记着母亲的话：哪里的花香，也比不过家乡院子里的桂花。飘零的岁月，芬芳的怀旧，难以割舍的童年，都依然历历在目。

琦君的作品中摆脱不了怀旧的思绪，悠悠的一份情思。其实她给我的感觉是她总有一份温情饱含在内，缓缓之中我有些看懂了琦君，她把童真收藏于脑海，她把温馨流泻于笔下，也是在收敛一些美好的情感，一些美丽的生活片段。

桂花雨课件(篇4)

教学目标：

1.知识与技能

(1)认识2个生字。读读记记“姿态、迷人、至少、邻居、成熟、完整、提前、香飘十里”等词语。

(2)正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。

(3)启发学生谈谈自己童年里难忘的人和事，训练学生的思维能力和语言能力。

2.过程与方法

通过自读自悟和与同学交流，体会作者思恋家乡的思想感情，并领悟这种感情是怎样表达出来的。

3.情感态度与价值观

通过感情朗读，体会作者对故乡的思念之情。

教学重点：

抓住课文中的主要内容和重点句子，体会作者的思想感情。

教学难点：

体会作者思恋家乡的思想感情，并领悟这种感情是怎样表达出来的。

课时安排：一课时

一、谈话引入。

1.谈话：同学们，童年是美好的、幸福的、难忘的，回忆童年美好的事情更是一种享受，充满了乐趣。让我们一起走进作家琦君的童年，欣赏美丽的桂花雨。

板书课题。

2.简介作者：琦君(1918—)现当代女作家。原名潘希真。浙江永嘉人。毕业于杭州之江大学中文系，师从词学家夏承焘。1949年赴台湾，在司法部门工作了26年，并任台湾中国文化学院、中央大学中文系教授。后定居美国。出版散文集、小说集及儿童文学作品30余种，内有《烟愁》《细纱灯》《三更有梦书当枕》

《桂花雨》《细雨灯花落》《读书与生活》《千里怀人月在峰》《与我同车》《留予他年说梦痕》《琦君寄小读者》《琴心》《菁姐》《七月的哀伤》以及《琦君自选集》等。

3.介绍桂花：桂花，也称木犀，木犀科。常绿小乔木，高达15m，冠卵圆形。叶对生，硬革质，椭圆形至卵状椭圆形，全缘或具疏齿。花簇生叶腋或顶生聚伞花序，黄色或白色，极香，花期中秋。核果椭圆形，蓝紫色，翌年夏初成熟。原产我国西南、华中等地，今各地普遍栽培。变种较多，有金桂、银桂、四季桂。是传统的名贵香花，城市绿化、美化的重要树种。桂花经蜜饯后，可做各种甜食。

二、检查预习

1.交流课前收集的有关桂花的名句。

因为桂花的花香持久，沁人心脾，历代文人墨客经常用美好的诗词歌颂它。

你们读过哪些有关桂花的名句来跟同学交流一下好吗？我们却从未听说桂花会下雨。

2.抽名读课文，解决生字、新词。

3.默读课文，思考：

课文主要讲了一件什么事？“桂花雨”是什么意思？

(课文主要讲了作者回忆自己童年的桂花和帮妈妈摇桂花的事。“桂花雨”是指好多桂花落下来，就像下雨一样。)

三、自读自悟细读悟情。

1.自读自悟(出示思考题)。

(1)默读2──6自然段，看看桂花给作者带来了哪些快乐？勾出有关的词

(2)把你喜欢的句子或段落读给同桌听。

2.细读悟情(讨论交流)。

重点理解句子：

(1)“桂花盛开的时候，不说香飘十里，至少前后十几家邻居，没有不浸在桂花香里的。”“全年，整个村子都浸在桂花的香气里。”

一个“浸”字，形象地写出了桂花的香气，桂花不仅花开时香，晾干了泡茶、做饼也同样香气弥漫。桂花，永远香在人们的心里。它的香，已挣脱了季节的束缚，香甜了四季，也香甜了人们的生活。

重点理解摇花时的乐趣：

(2)为什么说摇花对“我”来说是件大事？(理解“总是”)

(3)画出“我”摇桂花的。句子。

①理解“这下，我可乐了，帮大人抱着桂花树，使劲地摇”。

②想象“桂花纷纷落下来，我们满头满身都是桂花。”的情景。

③为什么说桂花纷纷落下来的情景“真像下雨”，而且是“好香的雨”？

四、品读体会。

1.八月桂花，十里飘香。杭州有一处小山，全是桂花树，花开时那才是香飘十里。可是母亲说：“这里的桂花再香，也比不上家乡院子里的桂花。”同是桂花，难道在不同的地方香味就不一样吗？为什么？

母亲这句朴素的话，与“月是故乡明”如出一辙。母亲每年都闻着桂花的香气，关注桂花，收获桂花，体验着馈赠桂花的快乐，吃着桂花做的食品，喝着桂花茶。桂花，已充盈她生活的全部空间。家乡院子里的这棵桂花树，是唯我的，是母亲生活乃至生命的一部分，还会有什么可以替代它呢？桂花是没有区别的，问题是母亲不是在用嗅觉区分桂花，而是用情感在体味它们。一亲一疏，感觉自然就泾渭分明了。从中，我们不难看出，家乡在母亲心中的分量。

2.“于是，我又想起了在故乡童年时代的“摇花乐”，还有那摇落的阵阵桂花雨。”这句表达了作者怎样的思想感情？

这个“又”字说明作者不止一次地想起故乡童年时代的“摇花乐”和桂花雨，只是这次母亲的话使他又一次想起。淡淡的一句话，却传递出了作者对故乡桂花深深的怀念。家乡的桂花，是跟作者童年的快乐连在一起的，那种“摇花乐”和桂花雨已植进了他的生命，成为他幸福童年的最美好、最耐人回味的记忆。这恐怕是作者难忘家乡桂花的真正原因。

五、拓展延伸。

回忆一下自己的童年生活，有没有不能忘怀的人和事？如果有，说给大家听听。

板书设计：

7、桂花雨

桂花飘香十里

摇花真像下雨

爱花赏花拾花

仿佛回到故里

教学反思：

桂花雨课件(篇5)

片断设计：

摇花对我来说是件大事。所以，我总是缠着母亲问：妈，怎么还不摇桂花呢？母亲说：还早呢，花开的时间太短，摇不下来的。可是母亲一看天上布满阴云，就知道要来台风了，赶紧叫大家提前摇桂花。这下，我可乐了，帮大人抱着桂花树，使劲地摇。摇呀摇，桂花纷纷落下来，人们满头满身都是桂花。我喊着：啊！真像下雨，好香的雨啊！

导语：如果说那浓郁的桂花香让作者非常喜欢，那么童年时代摇桂花所带来的乐趣，更让她难以忘怀。

1、请同学们打开书，自由、轻轻地读一读课文的第三自然段，找一找，你从课文中的哪些词句中体会到了作者的摇花乐。

2、学生自由读课文，体会。

3、交流体会，感悟摇花乐。

A、这下我可乐了，帮着在桂花树下铺竹席，帮着抱桂花树使劲地摇。

（1）这句话中，哪里让你感受到了我摇桂花的快乐？

（2）这里作者抓住了摇桂花时的动作来写，虽然只用了几个平常简单的词语，但一个活泼可爱的小女孩形象却跃然纸上，让我们仿佛看到了

（屏幕出示：）一位面带（）的小姑娘，迈着（）的脚步在庭院中帮铺竹席，抱着桂花树（）地摇。

谁能把话说完整。

（3）那么我们能不能把这种快乐和这样的景象读出来，试一试，谁来读，齐读。

（4）还有哪句话？

B、桂花纷纷落下来，落得我满头满身，我就喊：啊！真像下雨！好香的雨呀！

（1）这句话，你又是从哪些地方体会到作者摇桂花的快乐？

（2）是怎样的情景让作者情不自禁的喊起来？

（3）闭上眼睛，想象一下现在我们和作者一起站在那棵桂花树下，让我们也来使劲地摇桂花，桂花飘飘洒洒落下来。这时，你仿佛看到了什么？

（4）此时此刻的我，满头满身都是桂花，连我的心里也是满满的，装满了快乐。想想如果是你会怎样喊出这份快乐呢？能给这儿加个提示语再来喊一喊吗？

（屏幕出示：）于是我就（）地喊：啊！真像下雨！好香的雨啊！

（5）真美，从你们的朗读中我们看到了那落英缤纷的桂花雨，感受到了那心满意足的快乐。[

作者除了用文字来表达自己喜悦的情感，哪一位细心的同学还能找到作者通过什么来表达自己的情感的。（点击三个感叹号）作者一连用了三个感叹号，可以想象作者的心情是多么的快乐，这已经不能全部用语言来表达了。标点符号同样可以帮助我们表达感情。因此我们平时写作时也要注意标点的正确应用。

让我们再一起来读一读。把这不能用语言表达的喜悦之情通过朗读表达出来。（指名读，齐读）

短短两句话，作者通过动作和话语两方面的描写让我们感受了桂花雨的美和摇桂花的欣喜和激动。

摇啊摇，你觉得我摇出了什么？（满地的桂花；摇出了满身的桂花香；摇出了乐趣；摇出了童真；摇出了对小伙伴的思念）

桂花雨的美，桂花雨的香，摇桂花的乐成了小琦君一年一度的期盼。

桂花雨课件(篇6)

【教学目标】

１、自学课文中的新词，理解课文内容，体会作者表达感情的句子的含义。

２、想象课文描写的情景，体会作者表达的思想感情，有感情朗读课文。

３、体会作者喜欢桂花、摇桂花的乐趣和热爱家乡的思想感情。

【教学重、难点】

理解课文内容，体会作者表达的思想感情；想象课文描写的情景。

【教具准备】

电脑课件。

【教学时间】

１课时。

【教学过程】

一、谈话激趣，引入课题

１、让学生自由说童年趣事。

２、有位作家叫琦君，她也有难以忘怀的童年，让我们一起分享她童年的快乐，好吗？

３、引入课题，板书课题。

二、情景读题，就题质疑

读完课题，让学生就课题提出疑问。

三、作者简介，交流资料

１、简介作者情况：

本文作者琦君在１９４９年离开大陆去了台湾，她在台湾常常回想起自己的故乡，尤其是故乡的桂花，于是就写下了这篇脍炙人口的《桂花雨》。

２、交流桂花资料：

老师布置让大家查找有关桂花的资料，现在把你们的成果与大家分享吧！

３、生自由交流资料：

说到描写桂花的诗的时候，老师及时点拨：

有多少文人墨客都在赞美桂花，让我们一起走进课文，看看作者是怎样描写和赞美桂花的。

四、初读课文，整体感知

１、出示阅读提示：

⑴读读课文，说说课文讲了一件什么事？

⑵课文描写了怎样的情景？表达了作者怎样的思想感情？

⑶想一想桂花雨指什么？

２、生带着问题默读课文：

老师引导学生一边读一边勾画批注。

３、整体感知课文内容：

指名学生说课文主要内容，引导学生感受作者对桂花的喜欢。

五、精读课文，想象情景，体会感情

１、了解桂花树的样子：

琦君笔下的桂花树到底是怎样的呢？让我们从课文中寻找答案。

通过读描写桂花树样子的句子，电脑展示桂花树与梅花树对比的图片，让学生体会桂花

树笨笨的样子的可爱，感受作者对桂花的喜爱。

２、梳理课文脉络：

桂花树的样子笨笨的，琦君为什么还要写桂花呢？让我们一起读课文的有关内容，看看作者从哪几个方面描写了桂花？

通过读书让学生发现是从桂花的香和摇花的乐两方面写的。

３、体会桂花的香：

桂花到底有多香，让我们通过读书去感受吧！

⑴找出写桂花香的句子：

重点指导的句子：

桂花盛开的时候，不说香飘十里，至少前后十几家邻居，没有不浸。

在桂花香里的。全年，整个村子都浸在桂花的香气里。

⑵让学生读出描写桂花香的句子，感受语言文字的魅力。

⑶品尝桂花的香和甜。

⑷把桂花的香和甜通过读表达出来。

４、感受摇花的乐：

桂花的确很香，作者很喜欢它。其实最让作者高兴的事是──帮妈妈摇桂花。

⑴找出写作者想摇花的句子：

摇花对我来说是件大事，所以总是缠着母亲问：妈，怎么还不摇桂花呀？

⑵读句子感受作者急切的心理。

⑶演摇桂花的情景，说出此刻的心情。

⑷读写摇花乐的句子，感受摇花的高兴：

这下，我可乐了，帮大人抱着桂花树，使劲地摇。桂花纷纷落下来，我们满头满身都是桂花。我喊着：啊！真像下雨，好香的雨啊！

⑸动画演示作者帮妈妈摇桂花的情景，理解桂花雨指什么。

⑹身临其境，展开想象，自由评说。

⑺再次把摇花的乐用读表达出来。

５、感受母亲的思乡之情：

⑴出示母亲说的话：

这里的桂花再香，也比不上家乡院子里的桂花。

⑵品读句子，感受母亲对家乡的思念之情：

在母亲眼里，月是故乡的明，人是故乡的亲，花也是故乡的香。

６、体会作者深深的思乡之情：

由母亲对故乡的思念，引起了我对童年的回忆，勾起了我深深的思乡之情。

六、全课小结，拓展延伸

１、琦君八十多岁为寻根，再次来到故乡。她吃着桂花饼，品着桂花茶，泪水盈盈。琦君虽然身在台湾，可故乡一直没有离开过她，因为故乡一直在她的心里。

２、作者对故乡的思念，对童年的回忆，肯定引起了我们对童年的回忆，让我们把童年的趣事像作者一样写下来吧。

桂花雨课件(篇7)

教学目标

1．认识2个生字。读读记记姿态、迷人、至少、邻居、成熟、完整、尤其、提前、香飘十里等词语；

2．正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文；

3．通过自读自悟和与同学交流，体会作者思恋家乡的思想感情，并领悟这种感情是怎样表达出来的。

教学重、难点及解决办法

抓住课文中的主要内容和重点句子，体会作者的思想感情，是本课教学的重点，也是难点。可以采用以下思路展开教学：自读自悟；细读悟情；品读体会。

课前准备

学生已学了两篇回忆性的文章，可以根据学生家庭的实际，让学生听听长辈讲的关于小时候家乡生活的故事，丰富他们的感情体验，进一步体会人们的思乡情怀。

课时安排

一课时

教学流程

（一）谈话引入

1．谈话：同学们，童年是美好的、幸福的、难忘的，回忆童年美好的事情更是一种享受，充满了乐趣。让我们一起走进作家琦君的童年，欣赏美丽的桂花雨。板书课题。

2．简介作者：琦君（1918-）现当代女作家。原名潘希真。浙江永嘉人。毕业于杭州之江大学中文系，师从词学家夏承焘。1949年赴台湾，在司法部门工作了26年，并任台湾中国文化学院、中央大学中文系教授。后定居美国。出版散文集、小说集及儿童文学作品30余种，内有《烟愁》《细纱灯》《三更有梦书当枕》《桂花雨》《细雨灯花落》《读书与生活》《千里怀人月在峰》《与我同车》《留予他年说梦痕》《琦君寄小读者》《琴心》《菁姐》《七月的哀伤》以及《琦君自选集》等。

3．介绍桂花：桂花：也称木犀，木犀科。常绿小乔木，高达15m，冠卵圆形。叶对生，硬革质，椭圆形至卵状椭圆形，全缘或具疏齿。花簇生叶腋或顶生聚伞花序，黄色或白色，极香，花期中秋。核果椭圆形，蓝紫色，翌年夏初成熟。原产我国西南、华中等地，今各地普遍栽培。变种较多，有金桂、银桂、四季桂。是传统的名贵香花，城市绿化、美化的重要树种。桂花经蜜饯后，可做各种甜食。

（二）检查预习

1．交流课前收集的有关桂花的名句。

因为桂花的花香持久，沁人心脾，历代文人墨客经常用美好的诗词歌颂它。你们读过哪些有关桂花的名句来跟同学交流一下好吗？我们却从未听说桂花会下雨。

2．抽名读课文，解决生字、新词。

3．默读课文。思考：

课文主要讲了一件什么事？桂花雨是什么意思？

课文主要讲了作者回忆自己童年的桂花和帮妈妈摇桂花的事。桂花雨是指好多桂花落下来，就像下雨一样。

（三）自读自悟细读悟情

1．自读自悟（出示思考题）

（1）默读2──6自然段，看看桂花给作者带来了哪些快乐？勾出有关的词句。

（2）把你喜欢的句子或段落读给同桌听。

2．细读悟情（讨论交流）

重点理解句子：

（1）桂花盛开的时候，不说香飘十里，至少前后十几家邻居，没有不浸在桂花香里的。全年，整个村子都浸在桂花的香气里。

一个浸字，形象地写出了桂花的香气，桂花不仅花开时香，晾干了泡茶、做饼也同样香气弥漫。桂花，永远香在人们的心里。它的香，已挣脱了季节的束缚，香甜了四季，也香甜了人们的生活。

重点理解摇花时的乐趣：

（2）为什么说摇花对我来说是件大事？（理解总是）

（3）画出我摇桂花的句子。

①理解这下，我可乐了，帮大人抱着桂花树，使劲地摇。

②想象桂花纷纷落下来，我们满头满身都是桂花。的情景。

③为什么说桂花纷纷落下来的情景真像下雨，而且是好香的雨？

（四）品读体会

1．八月桂花，十里飘香。杭州有一处小山，全是桂花树，花开时那才是香飘十里。可是母亲说：这里的桂花再香，也比不上家乡院子里的桂花。同是桂花，难道在不同的地方香味就不一样吗？为什么？

母亲这句朴素的话，与月是故乡明如出一辙。母亲每年都闻着桂花的香气，关注桂花，收获桂花，体验着馈赠桂花的快乐，吃着桂花做的食品，喝着桂花茶。桂花，已充盈她生活的全部空间。家乡院子里的这棵桂花树，是唯我的，是母亲生活乃至生命的一部分，还会有什么可以替代它呢？桂花是没有区别的，问题是母亲不是在用嗅觉区分桂花，而是用情感在体味它们。一亲一疏，感觉自然就泾渭分明了。从中，我们不难看出，家乡在母亲心中的分量。

2．于是，我又想起了在故乡童年时代的摇花乐，还有那摇落的阵阵桂花雨。这句表达了作者怎样的思想感情？

这个又字说明作者不止一次地想起故乡童年时代的摇花乐和桂花雨，只是这次母亲的话使他又一次想起。淡淡的一句话，却传递出了作者对故乡桂花深深的怀念。家乡的桂花，是跟作者童年的快乐连在一起的，那种摇花乐和桂花雨已植进了他的生命，成为他幸福童年的最美好、最耐人回味的记忆。这恐怕是作者难忘家乡桂花的真正原因。

（五）拓展延伸

回忆一下自己的童年生活，有没有不能忘怀的人和事？如果有，说给大家听听。

六、板书设计

7*、桂花雨

桂花飘香十里

摇花真像下雨

爱花赏花拾花

仿佛回到故里

苏教版四年级语文教案习作3写一种植物

一、教学目标

1、读懂例文知道写植物要善与观察它的茎、叶、花，并注意其各自的特点，然后准确、生动地写下来。

2、能按作业的要求有目的、有侧重地观察一种植物，抓住植物的主要部分及其特点。

3、学习例文写作方法，写一篇介绍自己所观察过的植物的主要部分，突出主要特点，并注意与其他植物的区别。

二、教学重点及难点

重点：抓住植物的主要部分及其特点

难点：写清植物的主要部分的特点及与其他植物的区别

三、教前准备

请你自己观察一植物，然后把所获得的有关内容填写在下面的表中。

观察记录表

植物名称；年月日

观察对象颜色发现什形状么特点气味味道像什么茎叶花果根

四、教学过程

1、揭题；今天我们来学写一种植物。

2、学习例文

（1）出示桑树，图文结合，自读例文

（2）思考：

小作者是从几个部分写桑树的？

他是怎样介绍各个部分的特点的？

3、四人小组交流，汇报学习情况

教师及时板书：

叶子：大、翠绿、鲜亮

果实：颜色变化

生命：叶子生长较快

4、教师归纳小结

要点：茎、叶、花、果，可介绍它们的形状、颜色、味道、给人的感觉等。

顺序：观察有序，突出重点。

5、交流观察记录表

指名汇报，如实叙述

加以想象，展开叙述

6、动手试作

（1）出示要求：观察一种植物，看看他的茎（或干）、叶、花（或果实）有什么特点，先想想，再仿照例文写下来。

（2）编写提纲，完成习作

（3）自改、互改，直到满意为止

7、认真誊写

桂花雨课件(篇8)

【学习目标】

1.认识2个生字读读记记“姿态、迷人、至少、邻居、成熟、完整、尤其、提前、香飘十里”等词语

2.正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文抓住事例及景物，通过自读自悟和小组合作，想象课文描述的情景，体会作者对童年生活和对家乡的怀念之情，领悟作者的表达方法

3.全力以赴，激情参与，培养热爱生活的情趣和热爱家乡的思想感情

【使用说明与学法指导】

1、养成良好的阅读习惯，学会圈点勾画、批注及编写文段序号

2、通过独立思考、深情朗读、小组合作，品析精彩语句，体会作者思恋家乡的思想感情，并领悟这种感情是怎样表达出来的

3、认真研究学案，独立思考，限时20分钟完成;规范书写，运用好双色笔;小组合作探究，答疑解惑

【内容导航】

本文是一篇语言优美的散文，文中弥漫着作者淡淡的思乡情绪和对故乡生活美好的回忆，桂花雨是留在作者记忆中关于故乡最美好、最迷人的一个印象作者先写了自己最喜欢桂花，喜欢它迷人的香气，接着写了摇桂花的事情，最后写了离开家乡后赏桂花，给母亲带桂花，却时时想起故乡童年时代的摇花乐和桂花雨

【自主学习】

1、选择自己喜欢的方式读课文，把课文读正确，读通顺一边读一边想：课文主要写了什么内容?

2、默读阅读提示，思考：阅读提示对我们提出了什么要求?带着要求读课文边读边想

3、我能给课文中的形近字组词

茁()捧()吩(　)栋()

拙()棒()纷(　)拣()

4、我能快速地在课文中找出下列词语的近义词

家乡( )观赏( )认真( )

担忧( )赶忙( )时期( )

5、我能将课文中的句子写完整

桂花树的样子，不像不开花时，;开花时，

6、我知道下列句子用了什么修辞手法

夸张比喻拟人

⑴.一山的桂花树开花时，那才是香飘十里( )

⑵.我一摇，桂花纷纷落下，真像下了一阵桂花雨( )

⑶.笨笨地桂花树可惹人喜爱了( )

【合作探究】

问题一：默读2──6自然段，看看桂花给作者的童年带来了哪些快乐?画出课文中的有关语句，边读边想象语句中所描绘的情景，再说一说此刻在脑海中出现了一幅怎样的画面，从画面中你感受到了什么?

问题二：联系课文内容，谈谈对句子的理解

①“桂花盛开的时候，不说香飘十里，至少前后十几家邻居，没有不浸在桂花香里的”“全年，整个村子都浸在桂花的香气里”

②八月桂花，十里飘香杭州有一处小山，全是桂花树，花开时那才是香飘十里可是母亲说：“这里的桂花再香，也比不上家乡院子里的桂花”同是桂花，难道在不同的地方香味就不一样吗?为什么?

③“于是，我又想起了在故乡童年时代的“摇花乐”，还有那摇落的阵阵桂花雨“这句表达了作者怎样的思想感情?

④想一想，课文中是否还有让你回味无穷的句子?在哪里?找出并有感情地读一读，再评议为什么要这样读

【练练测测】

1、归类写词语(至少5个)

花类：梅花、桂花、

鸟类：大雁、麻雀、

树木类：松树、榆树、

2、句段推敲

“桂花盛开的时候，不说香飘十里，至少前后十几家邻居，没有不浸在桂花香里的”

在句中“浸”的意思是：，你觉得“浸”在这里用得好吗?为什么?

这下，我可乐了，帮大人抱着桂花树，使劲地摇摇呀摇，桂花纷纷落下来，我们满头满身都是桂花我喊着：“啊!真像下雨，好香的雨啊!”

这段文字描写的是作者童年时代( )的场景

作者用了哪些动词来表现这个场景?把动词写在下面

【拓展延伸】

①读了这篇课文，你的内心会产生怎样的感受呢?

②读了课文，我也想起了一些难忘的人和事

听到，我总会想起，还有

看到，我总会想起，还有

桂花雨课件(篇9)

一、解读文本的重要性

新课标指出：阅读教学是学生、教师、文本之间对话的过程，是教师、学生运用自我期待同文本撞击的过程。在这样的一个过程中文本是一个重要的对话者。所谓文本，它是教学的凭借，是作者思想和体验的载体，它用语言文字组成了多姿多彩、精彩纷呈的世界。我们要在课堂中引导学生走近它，与角色交谈，与作者交流。因此，研读文本，在文本中寻找有效的资源，并在课堂上有效解读和利用，是提高教学质量的一个重要手段。

二、错误的解读

提起走进文本，也就是我们平时所说的文本解读，或者说是教材理解。我记得著名特级教师支玉恒说过这样的教育感言：我备课，决不先看参考书，自己备好了，可以参考一下，每一课都要经历一个独立思考的过程。独立思考的过程又是怎样的一个过程呢？自认为有几年教学经验的我，曾经是这样理解和实践的：把课文内容熟悉；然后翻阅参考书、教案；查阅这篇课文内容的相关内容，如作者简介、时代背景之类的；最后，针对自己的教学实际做出计划。

这样解读文本时，没有考虑到学生解读障碍，甚至连自己解读时遇到的问题，都是照搬参考书解决的；教学时怀疑学生的能力，搬用专家的意见方便。正因为课前对文本解读态度上的不够注视，方法不得当，所以感觉自己的课堂教学止步不前。再看看身边一些课堂上，很多老师也存在以下问题：把文本精品肢解，大多只讲一下背景，分析一下词句，理一下段落，归纳一下主旨，品品写作特点，把语文课上成写作课；或者上成了有关领域的学术课、知识课、信息课：或者仅把文本当作思维的触发点，大搞创新、发散思维；或者片面强调人文性，把语文课上成了政治课。我想其主要原因是教师没有把握语文工具性、人文性的性质。以上做法，无论偏向工具性，或者偏向人文性，听说读写能力难免都会落空，创新恐怕也只是纸上谈兵。只有我们超越文本，开放文本，缩短文本与学生原有知识、生活经验的距离，才能帮助学生理解文本、把握文本，逼近文本的真义。

三、潜心解读《桂花雨》

当然，文本的解读是多向的，专家的解读只代表一种意见，我们可以有自己的合理的解读。再说，学生也很喜欢有独特见解的教师，更希望听到老师对自己恰如其分的评价。因此在教学《桂花雨》这篇课文时，我首先以读者的身份走进文本；然后，在以欣赏者的身份跳出文本；最后，以教师的身份去解读文本（还要站在学生的角度）。下面我来具体地谈一谈我是怎么解读文本的。[

第一读，作为读者，整体把握课文内容，体会作者表达感情的主旨。

这是一篇回忆童年生活的文章，描写了在家乡摇落桂花时的情景，表现了儿时生活的乐趣，字里行间充满了对家乡、对童年生活的无比怀念。课文先写小时候对桂花的喜爱，写为什么要摇桂花，接着主要描写了我帮大人摇桂花、收桂花的快乐情景，最后写我对童年时代摇花乐的怀念。作者以童年时代的眼光看待事物，反映出纯真的童趣、纯朴的情感，这种情感集中体现在摇桂花这一场景之中。文章语言清新，情感丰富而真挚。

第二读：还是作为读者探究作者是如何通过语言文字来描写摇桂花的快乐。

摇花前

摇桂花对我是件大事，所以老是缠着母亲问：妈，怎么还不摇桂花！从大事|、缠着两个词中体会到作者盼望早点摇桂花的急切心情。尤其值得一提的是结尾的感叹号。作者是问的预期，结尾却加个感叹号。感叹号一般是用来抒发比较强烈的感情。作者这里用感叹号是为了说明自己非常急切地盼望早点摇桂花。从一就赶紧、提前这些词中可以体会出母亲也很关心摇桂花这件事。

摇花时

1这下我可乐了，帮着在桂花树下铺竹席，帮着抱桂花树使劲地摇。作者喜形于色地帮着在桂花树下铺竹席、抱桂花树使劲地摇这几个连续动作就是作者作为孩子，帮助家人摇桂花时做些力所能及的事情的快乐心情的流露。

2我就喊：啊！真像下雨！好香的雨阿！啊！其实就是作者对桂花飘落下来样子的赞美此时作者多么兴奋、快乐！真像下雨是说桂花飘落下来的样子很美，就像下雨，给人一种美的感受。好香的雨啊！是说桂花飘落下来时，带着浓郁的香味。这香味沁人心脾，令人陶醉！作者除了用文字来表达自己喜悦的情感，还一连用了三个感叹号。可以想像作者的心情是多么快乐。这时作者的快乐已经无法用语言来表达了，只有借助标点符号才能表达内心强烈的感情。

妈妈

文中的洗净除了能说明母亲不忍把桂花弄脏。其实在我们这里，这也是一种乡俗的体现。学习课文时可以让学生回忆家人拜祭神仙时的虔诚。文中母亲拜祭桂花神，感谢花神给全村人带来了丰收。父亲则以自己喜欢的吟诗的发式表达内心的喜悦之情。父亲口占一绝的诗又是对前文内容的浓缩。让学生联系上下文便能理解。[

全村人

全年，整个村子都浸在桂花的香气里。这句中的全年、整个村子从时间、空间的角度巧妙地写出了桂花带给人们、家乡的欢笑、快乐。以浸写香，化无形为有形，更是神奇地把琦君及家乡亲人们整个身心融于桂花香气的幸福感受展现无遗，与题目桂花雨遥相呼应。同时，浸润桂花雨中的香甜感受为反衬作者如今的思乡情愁打下伏笔。

回味香

香，是文章的一眼睛。全文香字共出现八次，写家乡院子桂花带有香的句子共五句，涉及香之味、香之韵、香之形、香之情

思乡情

这里的桂花再香，也比不上家乡院子里的桂花。再次，母亲对故乡桂花的怀念是教学上的难点。杭州的一处小山全是桂花，香飘十里。而母亲却说：这里的桂花再香，也比不上家乡院子里的桂花。母亲这句朴素的话，与月是故乡明如出一辙。母亲每年都闻着桂花的香气，关注桂花，收获桂花，体验着馈赠桂花的快乐，吃着桂花做的食品，喝着桂花茶。桂花，已充盈她生活的全部空间。家乡院子里的这棵桂花树，是唯我的，是母亲生活乃至生命的一部分，还会有什么可以替代它呢？桂花是没有区别的，问题是母亲不是在用嗅觉区分桂花，而是用情感在体味它们。一亲一疏，感觉自然就泾渭分明了。

桂花雨课件(篇10)

前日教完了《桂花雨》一文，准确地说是在邓强亮主任上完一人一课研讨课之后。坐在教室后面，一边听邓主任讲课，一边思考如果换了我会怎么上这个问题。

这篇课文是台湾的作家琦君写的，她早年在杭州读书，家在江浙。1949年赴台湾，那个年代过去的人，老了大多思乡，落叶归根，人老思乡，是常理。正如台湾作家余光中先生的诗作《乡愁》一样，又如酿造的高粱酒，愈是有年头愈是香醇。作家写此文追忆童年于摇花乐，寄思乡于家乡旧宅院子里的金桂。前者在文用了大量的笔墨描述，表现得淋漓尽致，但后者在文中并没有点明，只说每次作家长大后从外地回来，总要带一大袋桂花给母亲，可是母亲常常说：外地的桂花再香，还是比不得家乡旧宅院子里的金桂。以及每到这时，我就会想要、起童年时代的摇花乐和那阵阵的桂花雨。母亲思乡，我是母亲的女儿，当然也会有遗传。甚至于乡情更浓于母亲。这也就是作家用笔的含蓄所在。基于此，我教此文时，就把寄思乡于文这种情感的熏陶放在首位。当然作者的这种情感是通过喜爱桂花摇桂花收桂花的童年摇花乐来展现的。所以要感悟作者的思乡之情，先得读出摇花之乐。

有了这一想法，我先引导学生把桂花的香读得香香的，浓浓的。桂花开得最茂盛时，不说香飘十里，至少前后左右十几家邻居，没有不浸在桂花香里的、全年，整个村庄都沉浸在桂花香中。这两句集中体现了桂花的香。特别是浸，沉浸仿佛把村庄和人都浸泡于桂花香气形成的海洋之中。读到此处，我引导学生回想起三年级学过的《槐乡五月》，槐花香，整个村庄都浸在香海中了。这两处的用法如出一辙。前后联系起来读，更亲切，仿佛有香到看得见摸得着之感。因此我认为读书一定要善于联系，迁移。又如读到父亲闻到桂花香，诗兴大发，即时口占一绝中最后两句是儿童解得摇花乐，花雨缤纷入梦甜。儿童，解，我请学生一读，二读，三读，再读，读着读着，学生似乎有所领悟，我再挤一下：想到了什么？马上有学生说想到：人间四月闲人少，才了蚕桑又插田。儿童未解共耕织，也伴桑阴学种瓜。接着又有学生说：解落三秋叶，能开二月花。过江千尺浪，入竹万竿斜。不过我马上纠正说《风》中的解不是理解，明白之意。但我还是表扬了同学们会读书，会迁移，把书读活了。[

在读出花香之后，我和同学们一起直奔摇花乐。首先当然是要明白为什么这是件大事。读懂三个字老是缠，明白我摇花的迫不及待。读懂了，就能感悟到这什么是一个大事。也能读好我和母亲的对话。这又一个进行对话朗读训练的好机会。正因为我迫不及待，等到终于有机会摇了，一定兴奋不已。于是又有一个机会训练学生的朗读。啊！真像下雨！好香的雨呀！如何读出我的兴奋，虽然忙碌而快乐。摇花之后母亲对桂花的虔诚，父亲由引激起的诗兴。更加反衬出我摇桂花的乐趣。这就是摇花之乐。

在体悟到摇花之乐之后，体会母亲的思乡之情和作者的思乡之情自然水到渠成了。即使家乡的宅院旧更可能是破旧，残旧，但因为是自家的，所以总是恋恋不舍。引导学生理解这句话是，我也受到了感染。于是和学生一起背起《九月九日忆山东兄弟》《忆江南》《静夜思》等，在此基础上，我用下面的几句话作为总结：山是故乡美，水是故乡甜，茶是故乡浓，酒是故乡醇，日是故乡暖，月是故乡明，人是故乡亲。

浓浓的故乡情，尽在故乡的山山水水，一草一木，风土人情之中。

莫道情有千万种，人间最是乡情浓。

桂花雨课件(篇11)

无论是怎么样的教材，无论是做何种程度的备课，到了课堂都会有很大的变化。

在今天上桂花雨的时候，我们也是先从桂花的典故讲起的。月宫里的桂树，那美味的桂花酒，甜甜的桂花糕，醉人的桂花蜜，很自然的引到了琦君儿时家乡的桂花。

在第一自然段中，有关于桂花的描写，桂花树不想梅花那么有姿态，笨笨拙拙的。不开花时，满树茂密的叶子；开花季节，也得仔细的从绿叶丛里找细花。桂花不与繁花斗艳，可是它的香味儿真是迷人。

我在黑板上板书：满树茂密叶。接下来，学生在回答开花时的特点是说：绿叶丛中有细花。忽而转头间，看到了黑板上的前五个字，脑子里有了灵光。爸爸可是诗兴大发，我们为何不能？我要引导孩子也做一首关于桂花的诗。我就说：谁能把这句话说得简练些？有个孩子说：叶丛找细花。我把这句话改了一下：绿丛觅细花，然后板书在黑板上。前后对照，让孩子们读一下。孩子们读完，一下子发现：啊，老师，像我们背的诗！接着我说：我们背的五言律诗一般有几句啊？四句！那我们要是我们在写两句我们不是成了诗人了啊！我看到孩子们的眼睛闪耀出了光芒！好，我们也要做诗人!

写到不与繁花斗艳这个地方，孩子们的思路出现了问题，不知道如何用简洁恰当的语言来组织这句话，我就想起了毛泽东的《卜算子咏梅》里面的一句话要他们模仿：俏也不争春，只把春来报。待到山花烂漫时，她在丛中笑。孩子们立即说：俏也不争艳！有个孩子说：桂花不俏，只是细细的小花，不能这么说。改成不与花争艳行不行？

另外一个孩子说：不与花争艳太俗了，也太白话了！改成桂花不争艳好不好？大家一致通过，我又提出了要学会推敲，我们也来炼字，最后我们把艳改成妍字，就成了桂花不争妍。最后一句，要写香味了，孩子们说：香味飘十里！不够远！香味飘千里！还不够远！香味飘万里！桂子的十里花香远飘海内外了啊？不符合实际！我说。这时教室里一片沉默。突然，有个孩子说：老师，你在给我们讲诗词的时候曾经说过，艺术的真实不等同于生活的真实吗？您说李白的白发三千丈和飞流直下三千尺不是夸张地手法吗？我们这也是夸张的手法！掌声伴着话音的落下而响起！我一时语塞，是这么说过的，而且经常这样说，为什么到了写的时候却放不开手脚呢？聪明的孩子，智慧的孩子！我说。顺势把香味飘万里写在了最后一句尾联的位置上

于是我们的诗诞生了：满树茂密叶，绿丛觅细花。桂花不争妍，香味飘万里。孩子们得意洋洋，反复的吟诵，几遍之后我开始听到小声地嘟囔了：最后一句不好听！比我们平时背的诗差远了！我暗自窃喜，孩子们还是有鉴别能力的嘛，没有被一点的成功冲昏头脑。于是我说：我们的最后两句如何？是不是不那么好啊？孩子们很认可，说不上口。但是怎么改我们暂时还没有定论。那我们就往下看吧，到了学完这篇文章在回头写下这句诗。于是之后的桂花乐，摇花乐我们欣然而往，大家都沉浸在那浓郁的花香之中。关于浸字，我们总结为：大家沉浸在花香中，儿童沉浸在快乐中，大家沉浸在过年的气氛中，作者沉浸在对故乡的思念，对母亲的缅怀，对儿时的美好回忆中！于是我们的尾联应蕴而生：芬芳浸故园！

整个诗出炉了，孩子们要求起个名字，经大家一致讨论，定名为桂花吟，和前面我给他们吟诵的《红楼梦》中的《葬花吟》对应起来了。仿佛在朗读中看到了那花谢花飞飞满天的场景，仿佛闻到了那沁人心脾的芬芳。孩子们骄傲的把诗抄在了书上，不客气地在下面作者栏注明了：当代，***！他们自己的名字，他们自己的诗！

桂花吟

当代：***

满树茂密叶，

绿丛觅细花。

桂花不争妍，

芬芳浸故园。

孩子们的诗读起来是那么的稚嫩，对于他们来说，这确是他们的第一首诗，或许若干年后，我们的诗人会因此而诞生呢！其实我们的语文教学就是让孩子学会怎么运用语言文字，这种方式不仅让孩子把握了桂花的特点，同时也锻炼了他们的思维，语言的组织能力，简洁性，我们何乐而不为？

桂花雨课件(篇12)

听完课后，我们所有的听课老师就像跟随着杨老师一起沐浴了一场又美、又香的桂花雨，那感觉真是舒服、美妙极了。在杨老师的课堂上，没有一点做作的成分，有的是真实的教学实况，有的是朴实的教学方式，有的是扎实的教学效果，为此，在听课的过程中我发现了很多我要学的东西，现将我感受总结如下：

在处理课文的重点与难点时，杨老师抓住了两个点，一条线。两个点是母亲的一段话与我摇桂花快乐的一段话，一条线是我怀念童年、母亲思乡的感情线。在突破难点与重点时，杨老师给予学生大量朗读的时间，并在读中进行想象，进行感受、体会，在课堂上，杨老师引导学生多次进行反复朗读这两段话，在体会我摇花乐的同时，杨老师还引导学生体会父亲的丰收乐，母亲的助人乐，同时在体会的基础上进行朗读，在朗读中溶入自己的感情，领会文章的意旨。可以说在指导朗读上花了较多的时间，可谓下了一番工夫，在朗读的形式上也是多种多样，为此，学生对课文的重点与难点把握都很好，回答得也非常精彩。

提出一点个人看法，（不一定对）老师在引导学生回答出父亲、母亲对桂花的情后，还可以马上引导学生感受他们对乡亲们的爱，即浓浓的乡情，这样也可以为下文母亲为什么经常思念家乡旧宅子里的金桂而伏下一笔，也为突破难点打下基础。

桂花雨课件(篇13)

2、抓住语言训练点，想象课文描写的情景，体验摇花乐和思乡情。

3、揣摩文本语言，并学会运用来表达自己的情感。

教学理念：

1、课堂教学应在师生、生生对话交际的过程中进行。

2、阅读教学的重点是培养学生具有感受、理解、欣赏和评价的能力。

3、凭借文本，挖掘教材资源，在想象、诵读、体验等语言实践中，引导学生将文本语言转化为会运用的“活”的语言。

二、品味香气迷人.

1、大家自由读第二自然段，看看有什么.发现？

2、出示句子：桂花开得最茂盛时，不说香飘十里，至少前后左右十几家邻居，没有不浸在桂花香里的。

有什么感受？.

三、学习摇花乐。

1、用心读一读第三自然段。自由交流。

2、出示句子：“摇桂花”对我是件大事，所以老是缠着母亲问：“妈，怎么还不摇桂花嘛！”

3、读：这下我可乐了，帮着在桂花树下铺竹席，帮着抱桂花树使劲地摇。桂花纷纷落下来，落得我们满头满身，我就喊：“啊！真像下雨！好香的雨呀！.

4、想象写话。

5、这么香，这么迷人的桂花，我陶醉了，那父母亲呢？

6、诗：

自己再读一读父亲的诗，你想说什么？

四、品味生活香浓。

1、个别读第四自然段。

2、比较句子：

（1）花开得最茂盛时，不说香飘十里，至少前后左右十几家邻居，没有不浸在桂花香里的。

（2）全年，整个村庄都沉浸在桂花香中。

3、指导朗读。

五、感受乡愁。

桂花雨课件(篇14)

《桂花雨》是琦君的一篇散文，在原著上略有改动，初读这篇文章的时候，真的有些千头万绪，不知从何入手，这大概就是散文的特点形散吧，为了更了解教材，我认真阅读了原著《故乡的桂花雨》，及琦君的相关作品资料，了解到她1949年离开家乡去了台湾，后又定居美国。她日夜思念自己的家乡，希望回到自己的家乡，在她的很多作品中都抒发了她思念家乡的情感。这篇散文也不例外，借用了母亲的话语来抒发自己的情感，回忆摇花乐也是为了突出作者怀念童年的心情。体会作者的思想感情这是文章的重点及难点。课文以桂花雨为题，以桂花香为线索，写了我童年时代的摇花乐，表达了对家乡和亲人的美好生活的眷恋。如何抓住散文的神韵，如何把这看似很散的文章串联起来呢，本文情与彩的结合点在哪里呢？我想了很久，起先我是直接定在乐上，可是备好以后总感觉一上来就直接讲乐，没有任何的铺垫，学生对桂花虽然有些印象，但是不够深刻，也从来没有过摇花经历，感觉十分的空洞，所以最终放弃了，后来就先定位在桂花的香上。桂花的香是作者一家人爱桂花的情感源头。只有充分调动起学生对桂花的感情，才能为下文的摇桂花做好情感铺垫。教学中果然发现后者的效果。通过课件播放摇花动画及配乐，再加上师范读，将学生的情感融入在作者的情感中去，自然而然转到下文摇花乐的教学，这部分主要是让学生以读悟情，读中见悟。其中也穿插了对学生想象力和词语积累的训练，但是感觉下来能讲的学生不多，可能是我引导的不够，或者是平时的训练不多，以后一定加强这方面的训练。这一环节，我自己印象比较深的是，师生对话那个环节，学生不仅读得很不错，而且我从他们的表情中也感觉到了他们已经体会到作者的情感了。而且这样一遍一遍的读学生也不觉得枯燥，反而觉得十分有意思。在理解父亲的乐时，就抓住了他的一首诗，设计了让学生自己读悟意思的环节，感觉有些生硬，或许在无形之中破坏了美感。理解全村人的乐，主要是抓住了一句话，让学生感受到人寿年丰的情景。下面环节的教学，作者的情感流露出来了，先是借母亲的话语，有了前面的铺垫，学生理解这句话，还是比较的顺利的。然后直接用话语表达作者的感受，让学生静静的读体会情感，我还出示了《烟愁》后记中的一段话，相信可以通过这段话语，学生更可以体会作者的思乡之情。最后在《思乡曲》的音乐声和动画中再次体会作者和母亲的情感。结束全文。总体感觉，或许是内容安排了多了些，还是在某些环节耽搁了，以至于最后有些匆匆忙忙的结尾，还是值得思考改进的。

桂花雨课件(篇15)

一、教材分析:《桂花雨》是人教版五年级上册第二组课文中的一篇阅读课文，文章以“桂花”为线索，作者通过回忆童年时代故乡的桂花和与母亲一起摇桂花的事，表达了对家乡亲人和美好生活的眷恋。

二、学情分析:对于五年级学生来讲，已经具备了一定的赏析文本的能力，再加上本组课文前两篇文章的学习，奠定了一定的感情基础，所以，在这篇独立阅读课文中，学生对作者思念家乡的感情能感受，也能领悟

三、设计思想:文章清新自然，感情丰富真挚，在教学中如何调动学生的生活经验，让学生走进文本与文本对话，让学生走进作者与作者情感相融，是我本课设计与研究的重点。

四、教学目标：

1、正确流利有感情地朗读课文。

2、感受文本中的桂花香、摇花乐

3、体会作者思念家乡的思想感情。

五、教学重难点：

1、引导学生从摇花乐中体会作者对童年生活的留恋和对家乡的怀念。

2、体会母亲说的“这里的桂花再香，也比不上家乡院子里的桂花”所表达的感情。

六、教学策略与手段

在教学中我采用“读——赏——悟”的教学方法来组织教学，运用多媒体手段加以辅助，使教学更直观。

(1)读：让学生走进文本，与文本对话。

(2)赏：赏读文中优美的句子，积累内化。尤其是抓住描写桂花香味的句子中的“浸”字，以及摇桂花时一系列表示动作的词来品析。

(3)悟：抓住母亲的话让学生在读中悟情、在读中悟理、在读中悟法。

七、课前准备:自制幻灯片

八、教学建议：1课时

教学过程：

一、导入新课

同学们，在前面的学习中，老师和你们一起认识了很多女作家，也欣赏了她们优美的篇章，比如林海音的《窃读记》、叶文玲的《我的长生果》。今天，老师再给大家介绍一名女作家——琦君。(课件展示)下面，让我们一起走进作家琦君的童年，欣赏美丽的《桂花雨》——板书课题。

二、初读课文

1、这是一篇略读课文，对我们提出了这样的阅读要求：(课件展示)

2、听录音，注意纠正文中没读对的字词。

3、检查字词掌握情况。

4、自由朗读，思考：文章的主要内容是什么?

5、在阅读中，同学们有没有感觉出作者对桂花有着怎样的情感呢?从哪些句子可以看出?——喜欢

6、作者为什么喜欢桂花?(桂花香、摇花乐)

三、品读课文

(一)、在文中找出描写桂花香的句子，抓住“浸”分析

(二)、享受摇花乐

1、在文中找出摇桂花的句子读一读。

2、画出句中一系列动作的词，感受摇花的乐。

3、看到这纷纷下落的桂花，作者情不自禁的喊了起来，(课件展示)你想喊吗?你想怎么喊?喊给大家听听。

四、悟情

因为桂花的香气太迷人了，所以作者喜欢，因为摇桂花太使人感到快乐了，所以作者喜欢。正是因为对桂花的喜爱，才使得作者上了中学，全家离开了家乡来到杭州，还忘不了要去欣赏桂花，并且还要给母亲带回一大袋，满以为母亲会赞美桂花的香味，可是母亲却说(课件展示)难道真的是这里(杭州)的桂花不香吗?从哪里可以看出来?

是呀，不是因为这里的桂花不香，而是因为家乡的桂花充盈了母亲的生活，倾注了母亲的情感，母亲不是用鼻子闻桂花，而是用情感看桂花。那到底是一种什么情感让母亲觉得家乡的桂花香些呢?(思念家乡)

母亲的这句话也让作者又一次想起了自己的童年，想起童年的桂花香，想起童年的摇花乐。(课件展示)

同学们，作者母亲的这句话，也让老师想起了一句古诗：露从今夜白，月是故乡明。是呀，对于一个远离故土，在外漂泊的人来说，家乡的一切都是美好的，一草一木，一山一水，哪怕是那一片飘浮的云彩，都可以勾起他们对家乡的思念之情，请欣赏《故乡的云》

礼仪课课件精品五篇

每位老师不可或缺的课件是教案课件，因此教案课件可能就需要每天都去写。教案和课件是实现教学目标的基础。这份“礼仪课课件”是我精益求精的结果期待得到您的赞赏，希望这些信息能够为你的决策提供一些有用的帮助和支持！

礼仪课课件篇1

一、设计意图

我国是文明古国，讲道德、懂礼仪是学生健康成长的需要，但现在的中学生对“文明礼仪”的意识越来越淡薄、针对这些现象，特设计了主题为《文明礼仪伴我行》的主题班会，班会的主要思想是树立良好的班风班貌，让礼仪重回每个学生的心，使七年级学生从刚入校就受到良好的文明礼仪的熏陶。

二、设计理念

我国教育家陶行知先生有一句名言：“千教万教教人求真，千学万学学做真人。”说的就是教师首先要教育学生做一个真诚的人，而学生应该首先学做人，学做文明之人。而当今在优越的物质生活条件下成长起来的独生子女，在文明礼仪方面确实存在着很多不文明的言行，因此通过本次班会让学生体会到只要我们从身边做起，从小事做起，就能养成良好的行为习惯。

三、学情分析

本次活动的对象是七年级的学生，他们具有一定的听、说、合作能力及理解能力。为了使学生消除心理障碍，因

此活动要营造民主、和谐的课堂气氛，使学生敢说、想说、乐说，积极主动的参与到活动中来。

四、教学目标：

1、知识目标：让学生感受到讲文明，懂礼貌等礼仪是学生必须养成的行为规范，明白知礼、守礼、行礼的重要性，知道中学生的常用礼仪。

2、能力目标：学生通过体会和感悟对家庭、学校、社会礼仪的认同感，愿意自觉遵守礼仪，懂得从小讲礼仪用语的重要性，感受语言美的魅力。

3、情感、态度与价值观目标：学生通过从小事做起，从而获得美好的友谊，在为班集体做贡献中体现自身的价值，享受人生的乐趣。教法与学法

五、教法和学法

教法：在本节课的教学活动中，学生是主体，老师的主要是给予引导和总结。努力使视、听、说有机地结合，多角度、多层面地提高学生感知力。让学生从小懂得文明礼仪乃做人之本。

学法：学生主要以参与小品表演、朗诵、生生互动的形式进行体验、感悟。此外，我还收集了一些相关的图片、音乐等让学生获得听觉、和视觉上的直观信息，提高了学生学习的兴趣，更多、更快、更有效的传递了教学信息。

六、活动内容：

班会内容分为四大块———观赏图片、情景表演、礼仪示范、歌声升华。

七、活动形式：

观看图片、诗朗诵、小品、妙语接龙、欣赏歌曲，自我审视等形式。

八、活动准备：

1、加强宣传发动，向学生公布了本次《文明礼仪伴我行》主题班会的部分活动方案，进行全员发动，营造活动范围。

2、让学生从各种渠道收集有关文明礼仪的各种资料，如故事、图片、歌曲，准备节目（歌唱、小品等）

3、将适合本节班会课的资料制作成多媒体课件。

九、活动过程：

（一）、图片导入，明确主题：师生观赏文明礼仪的图片学生讨论，从图片中得到什么启发。

（二）、情景表演，辨析导行。

1、第一环节——通过图片，谈感受。

2、第二环节——小品表演《下课后》

3、第三环节——妙语接龙（一人说一条，从第一个同学说起，说一圈。如：人人为我→我行我素→素昧平生）

（三）、榜样示范，拓展延伸

4、第四环节——朗诵歌谣《文明礼仪三字经》，表演《礼仪示范》

（四）、总结回顾，歌声升华。

在《文明礼仪之歌》的音乐声中教师对本次班会总结。

十、课堂小结：

教师把文明礼仪比成一棵大树，而礼貌用语则好比叶子，只有文明礼貌用语多了，这棵大树才能枝繁叶茂，那么，如何让其枝繁叶茂呢？只有平时要养成良好的习惯、

同学们，习惯是一个人的资本，你有了好习惯，你一辈子都有用不完的利息；你有了坏习惯，你一辈子有偿还不了的债务。

礼仪课课件篇2

教师礼仪课件

近年来，随着社会的发展和教育的不断改革，教师的形象和身份变得越来越重要。教师作为社会的灵魂和学生成长的指导者，必须保持良好的教师形象和社会形象，发挥好教师的示范作用，为学生树立正面的社会形象。为了达到这个目的，教师礼仪显得尤为重要。本文将从教师礼仪的概念、重要性和实践方法三个方面进行探讨。

一、教师礼仪的概念

教师礼仪是指教师在教育教学过程中所表现的仪态、仪表、语言、行为等方面的规范和标准。它是教师职业道德的重要体现，也是教师形象的重要表现。教师的礼仪涵盖了多个方面，包括课堂礼仪、办公礼仪、社交礼仪、服装礼仪等。它是教师对社会的尊重和对学生的尊重的表现，可以有效地提升教师形象，号召师生树立良好的社会文明意识。

二、教师礼仪的重要性

教师礼仪具有至关重要的意义，对师生和社会都有积极的影响。

首先，教师礼仪是提升教师形象的重要手段。一位有良好礼仪的教师，可以得到学生和家长的尊重和信任，也可以赢得同事和领导的认可和支持。良好的形象可以让教师得到更好的发展和更广泛的人脉资源。

其次，教师礼仪是提高教学质量的重要保证。教师在教学过程中，如果表现出了不良的礼仪行为，很容易引起学生的不满和反感，影响教学效果。如果教师能够严格遵守礼仪规范，尊重学生，激发学生的学习热情，而且能够得到学生的信任和认可，教学任务才能更好地完成。

最后，教师礼仪是推动社会文明的重要手段。教师是社会的灵魂和引领者，他们的言行举止直接影响到学生对社会的认知和态度。如果教师能够有良好的礼仪行为，能够向学生传递积极向上的社会价值观，就可以让社会更加和谐、文明。

三、教师礼仪的实践方法

教师礼仪需要有实践方法的支持才能真正落地。具体而言，教师在提升自身礼仪形象方面需要注意以下几点：

1.注重仪表形象。教师应该保持整洁清爽的衣着，遵守职业装规范，并尽量符合自身的身材特点。另外，教师的仪表还需要体现出一份精神力量，可以通过定期锻炼、培养兴趣爱好等方式来增强自信和气质。

2.注重礼仪礼节。教师在平时的工作中，需要时刻关注自己的礼仪礼节，涵养未来的社交力量。在与同事、上级、学生和家长交往时，需要注意言行举止，让人感到自己的高尚和专业。

3.注重语言表达。教师在进行教学和沟通时，语言表达需要规范，字正腔圆，有节奏感。同时，教师还需要注重自己的语言礼貌，用文明文化的方式与人交流。

4.注重时间管理。教师工作比较繁忙，需要懂得合理利用时间，完成各种任务。此外，教师还需要在固定时间内完成工作，让自己的工作有可操作性。

总之，教师礼仪是提升教师形象和教育质量的重要手段之一。教师应该注重自身礼仪修养，展示出更加高尚崇高的教师形象，以期成为学生理想化形象，具备教育主义开拓人生思维和精神领袖的意义。

礼仪课课件篇3

教师礼仪课件

尊重是一种态度，是对他人最基本的尊重和关怀。而作为教师，尊重是我们必须遵守的底线。教师礼仪作为教育教学中不可或缺的一部分，涵盖着日常信仰、行为表现、声音语调等方方面面，是教育工作者参与教学活动时必须遵守的最低限度规范。该部分内容旨在引导教育工作者了解教师礼仪的基本概念、规范等，教育工作者必须了解并遵守这些规范，这不仅可以保证我们的教学权威性和专业精神，也可以提高教育质量，提供服务水平。

一、教师礼仪是什么？

教师礼仪通常是指教育工作者在教学和教务工作中遵守的规范和准则，是教育工作者行为准则和职业道德标准的体现。教师礼仪是教师责任心、职业精神和教育文化的象征，具有至关重要的意义。教师礼仪层面非常广泛，它不仅包括语言、行动、形象、待人接物等诸多方面，同时还要体现出教师与学生相互关系的基本准则。

二、教师礼仪的基本规范

1、端正的形象

教师应该在外表上给学生、家长、同事留下端正的形象。校服整洁，服装干净干爽，形体均匀匀称，言行举止仪表得当。这不仅可以让学生更加愉悦地接受教育，而且还可以强化教师的专业形象，提高教学效果。

2、专业的态度

教学是一项高度专业的工作，教师需要在教学中表现出专业的态度和职业精神，而不应该因为某些原因而影响这些态度和精神。教师应该始终保持专业的态度和学习精神，定期接受继续培训和教育，提高自己的学识和水平，以为学生提供更为优质的教育和服务。

3、和蔼可亲的语言

教师应该以和蔼可亲的语言和口吻与学生、家长进行交流，表现出温暖的心灵和关切。在教学中，人们往往会对老师和学生之间的互动评价，不合适的说话和动作不仅会影响学生的情绪和态度，而且还会影响学生的学习效果。

4、讲授生动活泼

教师是学生的榜样，讲授生动活泼、声情并茂的课程，不仅可以提高学生的学习兴趣和效果，还可以给学生带来更多积极的影响。

三、如何提升教师礼仪水平？

1、制定教师礼仪手册

制定教师礼仪手册，是教师提升礼仪水平的关键所在。手册应该包含教师礼仪的基本规则、基本准则和常见的礼仪技巧等方面，以起到规范行为、提高礼仪水平的效果。

2、定期组织培训

定期组织及参加教师礼仪培训，是提升教师礼仪水平的另一个关键所在。通过培训，可以加强教师离职工作的规范化和制度化，并提高教师礼仪水平。同时，教师可以分享和交流自己在教师礼仪方面积累的经验和技巧。

3、日常反省和总结

教师需要时常反省自己的工作和表现，自我感觉不佳、被学生或家长视为“有瑕疵”的行为需要及时反思。进行总结，梳理现有的工作或管理失误，并制定一定的改进措施。反思和总结，注重完善教师礼仪的精神文化，进而提高教育质量和水平，促进教学效果的发挥。

教师礼仪是教育教学中不可或缺的一部分，给学生们和家长留下一个体面的形象，不仅增加了信任感、亲和力，同时也会聚集许多好的元气，来提高教育教学及治理工作的效果。

礼仪课课件篇4

活动目的：

1.通过本次活动课，使学生认识到文明礼仪就在我们的身边，体会文明礼貌用语的重要性，在日常生活中会正确运用文明用语。

2.通过主题班会活动，使学生继承优良传统美德，从小养成良好的行为习惯。

3.培养学生从现在做起，从一点一滴做起，努力提高自己的文明礼仪修养，做一个新世纪讲文明懂礼貌的好孩子。

4.把礼仪贯穿到歌谣、听故事、朗诵等各种表演形式中，让学生受到情趣的熏陶和思想品德的教育，懂得礼仪对于小学生成长的重要性。

活动准备：

1.收集有关校园礼仪的歌曲，小故事

2.文明礼仪儿歌、朗诵等。

3.小黑板

活动重点：

通过活动希望学生能把校园礼仪的一些规范运用到生活学习中。

活动过程：

一、活动导入

中国自古以来就是礼仪之邦，文明礼貌是中华民族的优良传统，作为新一代的少年儿童，我们更不能忘记传统，应该力争做一个讲文明、懂礼貌的好学生，让文明礼仪之花常开心中，把文明之美到处传播！你们是祖国的花朵，祖国的未来让我们从小做一个讲文明懂你们的好孩子吧。

现在我宣布：“文明礼仪伴我行”主题班会现在开始。

二、活动开始

班主任：中国是一个有着几千年文明历史的古国，文化源远流长。作为礼仪之邦，中国历史上有很多故事至今仍深深的教育着我们，下面请听一听历史故事：“孔融让梨” “黄香诚心敬父母”。

孔融让梨：孔融小时候聪明好学，才思敏捷，巧言妙答，大家都夸他是奇童。4岁时，他已能背诵许多诗赋，并且懂得礼节，父母亲非常喜爱他。

一日，父亲买了一些梨子，特地拣了一个最大的梨子给孔融，孔融摇摇头，却另拣了一个最小的梨子说疲乏：“我年纪最小，应该吃小的梨，你那个梨就给哥哥吧。”父亲听后十分惊喜。孔融让梨的故事，很快传遍了曲阜，并且一直流传下来，成了许多父母教育子女的好例子。

黄香诚心敬父母：黄香小时候，家中生活很艰苦。在他9岁时，母亲就去世了。黄香非常悲伤。他本就非常孝敬父母，在母亲生病期间，小黄香一直不离左右，守护在妈妈的病床前，母亲去世后，他对父亲更加关心、照顾，尽量让父亲少操心。

冬夜里，天气特别寒冷。那时，农户家里又没有任何取暖的设备，确实很难入睡。一天，黄香晚上读书时，感到特别冷，捧着书卷的手一会就冰凉冰凉的了。他想，这么冷的天气，爸爸一定很冷，他老人家白天干了一天的活，晚上还不能好好地睡觉。想到这里，小黄香心里很不安。为让父亲少挨冷受冻，他读完书便

悄悄走进父亲的房里，给他铺好被，然后脱了衣服，钻进父亲的被窝里，用自己的体温，温暖了冰冷的被窝之后，才招呼父亲睡下。黄香用自己的孝敬之心，暖了父亲的心。黄香温席的故事，就这样传开了，街坊邻居人人夸奖黄香。夏天到了，黄香家低矮的房子显得格外闷热，而且蚊蝇很多。到了晚上，大家都在院里乘凉，尽管每人都不停地摇着手中的蒲扇，可仍不觉得凉快。入夜了，大家也都困了，准备睡觉去了，这时，大家才发现小黄香一直没有在这里。 “香儿，香儿。”父亲忙提高嗓门喊他，

“爸爸，我在这儿呢。”说着，黄香从父亲的房中走出来。满头的汗，手里还拿着一把大蒲扇。“你干什么呢，怪热的天气，”爸爸心疼地说。

“屋里太热，蚊子又多，我用扇子使劲一扇，蚊虫就跑了，屋子也显得凉快些，您好睡觉。”黄香说。爸爸紧紧地搂住黄香，“我的好孩子，可你自己却出了一身汗呀！”

以后，黄香为了让父亲休息好，晚饭后，总是拿着扇了，把蚊蝇扇跑，还要扇凉父亲睡觉的床和枕头，使劳累了一天的父亲早些入睡。

9岁的小黄香就是这样孝敬父亲，人称温席的黄香，天下无双。他长大以后，人们说，能孝敬父母的人，也一定懂得爱百姓，爱自己的国家。事情正是这样，黄香后来做了地方官，果然不负众望，为当地老百姓做了不少好事，他孝敬父母的故事，也千古流传。

班主任：听到这两个小故事，同学们觉得在生活中我们应该怎么对待我们的父母和兄弟姐妹？（学生自由发言）

班主任：现在我们在同一个学校，同一个教室里学习生活，让我们把同学们当成我们的兄弟姐妹吧！

三、朗诵

我们从小就要学习礼仪、用礼仪，要重言，更重行。让文明之花处处开放，老师也为同学们准备了一首文明礼貌歌，请同学们和老师一起动起嘴来读一读。（出示小黑板）

同学们，都知道，礼貌用语记得牢。对待长辈要用您，早晨见面说声早，平时互相问问好，分别再见别忘了，若求人请字先，最后别忘说谢谢，影响别人对不起，回答请说没关系，文明做个好孩子，人人夸我数第一。

希望同学们千万别忘了哟，把文明用语牢牢记在心间。

下面我们一起来听一首“文明礼貌歌”。

四、提问环节：

（场景一）当你想向同学借笔时，你该怎么说？怎么做呢？

（场景二）如果你不小心碰掉了同学的文具盒，你该怎么办？你的铅笔盒被碰掉

了，你生气吗？

（场景三）如果你在上楼道时，有同学被撞到了怎么办？

（场景四）大家都知道在学校里的规范礼仪是怎样的吗？（正确的走姿、正确的站姿、正确的坐姿、早上同学见面问好、课上举手回答问题等）

五、活动总结

同学们，今天我们学习了很多礼仪方面的知识，作为一名小学生，我们要做到遇到师长，要主动敬礼问好；上下楼梯，人多拥挤，注意谦让，靠右行走，保障畅通；讲究卫生，不乱扔果皮，见到纸屑随时捡起；爱护公共财物，不乱写乱划，严格遵守学校规章制度，相互监督，共同促进，争做一个讲文明、懂礼仪的好孩子。

礼仪课课件篇5

【活动目标】

1.初步懂得进餐礼仪，知道要文明进餐。

2.能用较连贯的语言表达自己的想法。

3.养成敢想敢做、勤学、乐学的良好素质。

4.教育幼儿养成做事认真，不马虎的好习惯。

【活动准备】

口杯若干，水果拼盘，盘子若千等。

【活动建议】

1、创设进餐情境：教室正前方摆放 2 张桌子，桌子上放着若干已倒好的饮料，和人数一样多的小盘子、水果拼盘、牙签。请几个幼儿分别到桌前坐好，让他们进餐，并请幼儿观察他们进餐的情境。

请幼儿分组讨论：他们进餐时是怎样的，谁做得对做得好?

2、教师请幼儿回忆以前在教室进餐时，小朋友进餐情况怎样?而现在到餐厅，你们的进餐情况又是怎样的?你们要怎样做呢?

幼儿举手回答，以前在教室进餐空间小，老师听到哪个小朋友讲话，就请他 (她)不要讲话，我们就静下来，从来没有大声讲话或吵闹的现象。而现在餐厅里人很多，也很吵。你们以后要怎么做呢?

幼儿总结：

我们以后，吃饭不掉饭粒，进餐时不能大声讲话，因为吃饭讲话不卫生，小朋友吃饭要安静，慊得尊重别人，对别人要有礼貌，吃好饭后，安静等小朋友，不能下座位乱走动等。

教师小结：

小朋友说得都对，我们要养成良好的进餐习惯，懂得文明进餐，老师想只要小朋友们都能管好自己的小嘴巴，安安静静地吃饭，别班的小朋友也能跟着安静下来，对吧!以后就要看小朋友们的表现了。

游戏：文明进餐，把幼儿分组，模拟进餐情境，其他幼儿当观众，看进餐的幼儿能否做到文明进餐。教师和幼儿一起对游戏进行评价。

结束：幼儿小鸟般飞出教室。

本次活动的主要目标是懂得进餐礼仪，知道要文明进餐;能用较连贯的语言表达自己的想法。教师在活动中要通过观看孩子们创设的进餐情境表

活动反思：

通过活动，幼儿知道了进餐过程中的一些基本礼仪，如进餐时不讲话，不能一心二用，不能挑食，吃完自己的一份食物后再离开餐桌。正确使用餐具，爱护卫生，进餐时保持自己、桌面、地面的清洁，进餐后会收拾自己的餐具并及时进行漱口和擦嘴。本次教学活动中，我虽然抓住了幼儿的心理特征，但是在材料的准备上，还不够充分，不能够给幼儿更多的提示。

一个成功的活动，离不开教师对每个环节精心的设计与考虑。总之，我们教师平时要多善于观察、多思考、多去了解幼儿，时刻做一个有心人。

2024高一英语课件(精品十五篇)

资料可以指人事物的相关多类信息、情报。当我们的学习任务遇到困难时，往往都需要参考资料。资料可以帮助我们更高效地完成各项工作。那么，你知道优秀的资料是怎样的呢？以下是由小编为你整理的《2024高一英语课件(精品十五篇)》，仅供参考，我们来看看吧！

高一英语课件(篇1)

I. 汉英翻译

1、发生……，结果…… 6、占有，占领

2、在世界的另一端 7、查询，提出

3、对……乐观 8、庆祝教师节

4、身体健康 9、由…组成构成

5、自求之路 10、开始干某事

II单词拼写

1 .It was very (大方) of you to lend them your new car for their holiday.

2.T he man (威胁) the little girl with a knife.

3.He was (极度) angry at the news.

4.They set out for the (远征) to the south pole.

5.Afrer (毕业)，he took a job as a typist.

6.When he woke up, he found some people (包围)him.

7. (农业)has been playing an important role in our country. .

8.In the end , the city was taken (拥有)of by the Red Army.

9.Active (山水)may empty at any time.

10.There are a lot of (埋葬)grounds at the foot or middle of the hill.

III单项选择

1.It will be two months Jane leaves school.

What will of her ?

She is going to be a teacher.

A. when, happen B. before, become

C. after, take place D. since, instead

2. I saw her, I was struck by her beauty.

A.When the first time B.During the first time

C.For the first time D.The first time

3.I was having my supper he called on me without any appointment made me unhappy.

A.before, as B.while, it C.as, that D.when, which

4.It was dark; we decided to for the nigt at a farmhouse.

A.put away B.put dowm C.put up D.put out

5.Hard work success while failure laziness.

A. leads up; lies to B. leads to; lies in

C. leads on; lies of D. lead down; lies by

6.I can guess you were in a hurry, you your sweater inside out.

A.would wear B.wore C.had worn D.are wearing

7.I had an accident a car and I was woozy hitting the car door.

A.of; by B.with; by C.with; from D.on; from

8.Mary, I didn’t recognize you at the party.

I my hair and sunglasses.

A.have cut ; wear B. had cut; was wearing

C.cut; put on D.was cuttimg; was putting on

for women seems men ,due to the tradition and the society.

A. twice difficult as B. as difficult as

C. twice as difficult as D. twice as difficult than

10.I can’t get the book on the top shelf, for it is my reach.

A. within B.beyond C.out D.from

11.Huang shan is famous its landscape and known a place of interest the world.

A.for; as ; to B.with;for; by C.to; for; wifh D.by; as; for

12.Girls one third of the total student population in our school, which 5678 students.

A.make of; is made up B.make up ; is made up of

C.make from; make up D.made into ;make up of

13.China has a population of 1.3 billion, _____are Han Nationality.

A. most of it B.two thirds of whom

C.70% of which D.mainly of them

14._____of the city lies a lake.

A.To east B.In east C.On east D.East

IV.课文填词

1.It has often been_____that life is difficult as it is.

2.What has______her?

3.On November 12th the storm died______.

4.I couldn’t ______my left leg and my head was woozy from hitting the ground.

5.I did so______regret.

6.He lives in a town ______the east coast.

7.Hainan Island is ______the south of Guangdong province.

8.Henan province lies _____central china.

9.The ship hit a rock _____the west coast of the pacific.

The Key

I :

1.to become of 2.at the opposite end of the world

3.to be oppotimistic about 4.to be in good health

5.the way of self rescue 6.to take possession of

7.to refer fo 8.to celebrate Teachers’ day

9.to be made up of 10.turn to doing something

1.generous 2.threatened 3.extremely 4.expedition 5.graduation 6.surrounding 7.Agriculture 8.possession 9.volcanoes 10.burial

III

1--5BDDCB 6-10 DCBCB 11---14ACBD

IV:

1.said 2.become of 3.dowm 4.stand on 5.without 6.on 7.on 8.in 9.off

高一英语课件(篇2)

【知识网络】

一、重点词汇与短语

1．add用法小结：

（1）的基本意思是“增加、添加，加上”，一般作及物动词，后接名词、数词等作宾语。例如：

Add more hot water to the soup – it is too salty. 在汤里多加点热水 – 太咸了。

Add a few more names of laborers to the list.

名单上再加上几个工人的名字。

（2）表示“加；加起来”的意思。

例如：

If you add 4 to 3， you get 7. 四加三得七。

Add up these figures, please. 请把这些数字加起来。

（3）表示“补充说；又说”。

例如：

I should add that we are very pleased. 我要补充的是我们非常高兴。

I should like to add that we are pleased with the test result.

我还要补充说一下,我们对测试结果表示满意。

（4）常用短语：

●add something to something: add fuel to the fire: 火上浇油

●add up/together: 加算；合计He wrote down the weight of each stone and then added up/together all the weights.

他把每一块石头的重量记下来，然后把所有的重量加在一起。

The various facts in their report just don't add up.

他们报告中的各方面材料根本串不起来。

●add to: 增加

Our coming added to your trouble. 我们的到来给你们增加了麻烦。

●add up to：总计达到…，总和为…，总数达…：

His debts added up to 40,000 dollars. 他的债务总计达到40，000美圆。

2．remind用法小结：remind作为及物动词，常与of, to infinitive, that连用，意思是“使想起；使记起；提醒”。

例如：

Remind me to write to Mother. (后接somebody to do something )

提醒我给妈妈写信。

This reminds me of last year. (后接somebody + of + something)

这使我想起去年的事。

In case I forget, please remind me about it. （后接somebody + about + something）

请提醒我一下，以免我忘记。

He reminded me that I had done it before. （后接that从句）

他使我想起我以前做过了。

3．wonder用法小结：

（1）wonder既可以作及物动词，也可以作不及物动词使用。常与at, that连用，意思是“觉得奇怪；惊奇；纳闷；想知道”。

例如：

I wonder. In England, each man speaks a different language.

我感到十分惊奇,在英国每个人都说着一种语言。

I wonder at his rudeness. 我对他的粗鲁感到奇怪。

He wondered why people built ugly homes, when they could have beautiful ones.

他很奇怪为什么人们本可以造出漂亮的房屋,而偏偏建造出丑陋的房子来。

He was just wondering how to do it. 他只是想知道怎么做这个。

Ted wondered why he was wanted by the police, but he went to the station yesterday.

特德不知道为什么警察局要他去,但昨天他去了。

I wonder why James is always late for school.

我想知道为什么詹姆斯上学总是迟到。

（2）wonder还可以作名词，意思是“惊奇；惊叹；奇观；壮举；奇才”。

例如：

The boy looked at the stranger in wonder.

那个男孩惊奇地看着那个陌生人。

They were filled with wonder when they saw the spaceship.

当他们看到宇宙飞船时，他们非常惊奇。

He has visited the seven wonders of the world. 世界七大奇观他都参观过了。

He's a wonder. 他是个奇才。

（3）习惯用语：

● It's a wonder：难得；奇怪的是

It's a wonder you recognized me. 难得你还认得我。

● (It's) no wonder 难怪；并不奇怪；当然

No wonder he is not hungry; he has been eating sweets all day.

难怪他不饿，他整天在吃糖果。

二、词义辨析

1．last, latest 与newest的区别：

（1）last表示“最后的，刚刚过去的；紧接前面的”，强调顺序。

例如：

She was the last to arrive. 她是最后到的。

He was the very last to leave the office. 他是最后一个离开办公室的。

He would be the last man to do such foolish things. 他决不会干这种蠢事。

He won the last election. 上次选举他获胜了。

（2）latest意思是“最新的，最晚的，最近的”。

例如：

Everyone wants to read the latest news, no one wants yesterday’s newspaper.

人人都想读到最新的消息，没有人想要读昨天的报纸。

（3）newest表示“最新的”，它是与旧“old”相对的。

例如：

The man put on his newest clothes to attend the party.

那个人穿上最新的衣服去参加晚会。

2．whatever 与no matter what的区别：

两者都表示“无论什么，”但是在用法上有所区别：whatever既可以引导让步状语从句，又可以引导名词性从句；而no matter what只能引导让步状语从句。

例如：

No matter what you say, I’ll still do it alone. （让步状语从句）

=Whatever you say, I’ll still do it alone. （让步状语从句）

无论你们说什么，我还是要自己做这件事。

Whatever we said, he'd disagree. （让步状语从句）

College students are seen doing whatever work they can find. （宾语从句）

我们可以看到,只要有工作,大学生们什么都干。

Do whatever she tells you and you'll have peace. （宾语从句）

她叫你干什么你就干什么,那你就太平了。

Whatever happens, the first important thing is to keep cool. （让步状语从句）

不管发生什么事,头等重要的是保持冷静。

You may do whatever you want to do. （宾语从句）

无论你想做什么事，你都可以做。

Whatever we do is our own business. （主语从句）

无论我们做什么，那是我们自己的事。

三、重点句型

1．Cellphones, or mobile phones, make it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere.

此句中，动词make为使役动词，后面接复合宾语，此句的it为形式宾语。

再如：

We found it important to complete our task on time.

我们发现按时完成任务很重要。

2．I don’t dare to use the phones in school, because they will take it away from me.

此句中的dare为行为动词，后面要接带to的不定式，但在口语中，有时to也省略；dare如果作情态动词，则后面一定直接接动词原形，且无人称、数、格的变化。

例如：

He dare not drive the care on expressways, as all the other cars are going so fast. （情态动词，注意其形式）

他不敢在高速公路上开车，因为所有其它的车都跑得那么快。

I didn’t dare (to) do it in class because the teacher might scold me. （及物动词，注意to的问题）

我不敢在课上做这件事，因为老师会训我。

3．Some parents worry that their children will spend too much time and money on phone calls.

此句的worry后面接宾语从句。Worry后面还可以接about 构成词组，表示“对…担心”，强调动作；另外，词组be worried about 也表示“对…担心”，强调状态。

再如：

Where have you been? We’ve been worried about you.

你去哪儿了？我们一直都在为你担心。

Parents always worry about their children.

父母总是为自己的孩子担心。

【考点透视考例精析】

[考点] 考查谓语动词被动语态的用法。

[考例1] --Have you moved into the new house?

--Not, yet, the rooms _______________.

A．are being painted B．are painting

C．are painted D．are being painting

[解析] A 本句的意思是“因为新房子正在粉刷，所以我还没有搬进去”。用现在进行时的被动语态。

[拓展] 除了现在进行时的被动语态，过去进行时的被动语态也是值得注意的一点。

例如：

The lost children were last seen playing by the side of the river.

最后有人看见那些失踪的孩子在河边玩。

[考点] 介词短语的语义辨析。

[考例2] I don’t think I’ll need any money but I’ll bring some ___________.

A．at last B．in case C．once again D．in time

[解析] B 本句前面的分句已经说明“主语认为自己不需要钱”，所以but后的分句说明“带上点钱以防万一”。

[拓展] in case与in case of的用法要注意。再如：

Take an umbrella with you in case it rains.

随手带把伞以防天下雨。

In case of danger he was always standing in front of me.

在危机时刻他总是站在我前面。

In case of fire, you should always stay calm.

在发生火灾的时候，你应该总是保持镇定。

[考点] 考查turn构成的词组的用法。

[考例3] The children are always _________ practicing playing football when they have PE lessons.

A．taking turns B．by turns C．in turns D．at turns

[解析] A 本句的空白处缺少谓语。因而用take turns doing something结构，意思是“轮流做某事”；by turns和in turn都可以表示“轮流做某事”，但都是介词短语，只能作状语。

[考点] 考察动词的时态。

[考例4] Mr. Smith searched the Internet for nearly two hours before he _________.

A．was decided well B．had made a good decision

C．made a good decision D．has made up his mind

[解析] C 本句的主句用了一般过去时态，因此也决定了从句的时态。排除了B、D项；make up one’s mind意思是“做出决定”，但是时态不对。

【基础演练】

一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。

1．As a great scientist, he is famous t___________ the world.

2． Please r________ me of my interview with Mr. Smith again tomorrow.

3．Those small factories are causing a lot of e_____________ pollution with all their noise and smoke.

4． They've r__________ the prices in the shop, so it's a good time to buy.

5． Jane o_________ the party. She a bought the food and drinks and asked people to come .

6． I made an ___________ (约定) to see the doctor yesterday.

7． She is a very ________________(有吸引力的) girl. Everyone likes her.

8． As a reporter, he is very _____________(成功).

9． They took strong _________（措施）against dangerous drivers.

10． The patient was asked to ring the bell in an ____________(紧急情况).

二、单项填空：

1．The coat ________ you well, but I don’t think the color _________ you.

A．dress, suits B．is fit for, fits on C．fits, suits D．is dressed, fits

2．She’s a bit shy and __________ answer teacher’s questions in class.

A．not dare to B．dare not to C．doesn’t dare D．dares not

3．Imagine that you are one of the volunteers __________ the foreigners, what should you do?

A．to choose serving B．choose to serve

C．choosing serving D．chosen to serve

4．Because of human being’s keeping killing, some kinds of animals are __________.

A．in danger of B．endangered C．dangerous D．in endanger

5．Someone called up in the middle of the night, but they hung up _________ I could answer the phone.

A．as B．since C．until D．before

6．It is generally considered unwise to give a child __________ he or she wants.

A．however B．whatever C．whichever D．whenever

7．The police found that the house _________ and a lot of things _____________.

A．has broken into, has been stolen B．had broken into, had been stolen

C．has been broken into, stolen D．had been broken into, stolen

8．What surprised me was not what he said but ___________ he said it.

A．in the way B．in the way that C．the way D．the way which

9．Our guests were expected at 8 o’clock, but they didn’t ________ till 8:30.

A．turn on B．turn up C．turn over D．turn down

10．Mr. Li made up his mind to devote all he could _______ his oral English.

A．improve B．to improve C．improving D．to improving

【能力拓展】

阅读理解：

When a rather dirty, poorly-dressed person kneels at your feet and puts out his hands to beg for a few coins, do you hurry on, not knowing what to do, or do you feel sad and hurriedly hand over some money? What should our attitude to beggars be? There can’t be no question that the world is full of terrible sad stories. It must be terrible to have no idea where our next meal is going to come from. It seems cruel not to give some money to beggars..

Certainly, most of the world’s great religions order us to be open-hearted and share what we have with those less fortunate than ourselves. But has the world changed? Maybe what was morally(道德方面) right in the old days, when one knew exactly who in the village had suffered misfortune and needed help, is no longer the best idea. Quite a few people will not give to beggars. Let us look at their arguments.

First, some believe that many city beggars dress up on purpose to look pitiable and actually make a good living from begging. Giving to beggars only encourages this sort of evil(恶行). Secondly, there is the opinion that there is no real excuse for begging. One might be poor, but that is no reason for losing one’s sense of pride and self-dependence..

Related to this in the opinion that the problem should be dealt with by the government rather than ordinary people . Some people think beggars should go to the local government department and receive help.

It is hard to come to any final conclusion; there are various cases and we must deal with them differently. A few coins can save a life in some situations, and even if the money is wasted, that does not take away the moral goodness of the giver.

1．What is mainly discussed in the passage?

A．Moral deeds of people. B．Religious activities of the church.

C． Moral goodness of the giver D．Arguments on giving to beggars.

2．What can we infer from the sentence “But has the world changed?” in the second paragraph?

A．People no longer know who was morally right in the past.

B．Some people will not do what was morally right in the past.

C．We don’t meet with those who need help any more.

D．Now it is the government’s duty to help the beggars.

3．Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage?

A．Some people dress up to pretend to be beggars.

B．Some beggars want money to help their children go to school.

C．Some beggars use the money to buy drugs.

D．Some beggars have no excuse for begging.

4．In the last paragraph, the writer thinks that it is hard to come to any final conclusion, because ___________.

A. the cases can be so different B. there are so many beggars

C. there is so much money wasted D. there are so many different arguments

参考答案

高一部分

Units 9-10 (B1)

基础演练

一、1．throughout 2．remind 3．environmental 4．reduced 5．organized 6．appointment 7．attractive 8．successful 9．measures 10．emergency

二、1-5 CCDBD 6-10 BDCBD

能力拓展

1-4 DBBA

1. D 这是一个主旨题。本篇文章主要讨论了是否给乞丐钱的观点。

2．B 这是一个细节推断题。根据第二段的句子“Maybe what was mortally(道德方面) right in the old days, when one knew exactly who in the village had suffered misfortune and needed help, is no longer the best idea.”可知答案。

3．B 这是个判断正误题。第三段讲述了“假装扮成乞丐”、“用乞讨来的钱买毒品”、“没有行乞的理由”。只有B项（乞讨来的钱送孩子去上学）没有在文章中提到。

4．A 这是一个细节题。原因在于作者说“there are various cases and we must deal with them differently”。说明作者是想告诉我们情况是各种各样的。

高一英语课件(篇3)

示范教案一(Unit13Healthy eating 4th)

The Fourth Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Review the useful expressions learnt in this unit by making sentences with them.

2.Review how to use some Modal verbs to give advice or opinion about something.

3.Let students know how to write recipes for their favourite dishes by reading“SNACKS”and two examples of recipes.

Teaching Important Points:

1.How to master Modal verbs-had better(not),should(not),ought(not)to.

2.How to let the students understand the text“SNACKS”better and learn to write a recipe.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to improve the students' integrating skills.

Teaching Methods:

1.Asking-and-answering activity to go through the reading material.

2.Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.a projector 2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ. Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ. Revision

T:Yesterday we learned the grammar-Modal verbs:had better,should,ought to and their negative forms.We know we can use them if we give advice or opinion about something.And we also know“had better”is less strong than“should”or“ought to”.Now let's do some exercises to see if you have mastered them.Look at the screen.

(Show the following on the screen.)

Translate the following into English.

1.你最好休息。

2.你最好不要吃不熟的水果。

3.对水果你应该认真些。

4.你不应该吃那么多垃圾食品。

5.你应该更努力地学习，取得更大的成绩。

T:You are given five minutes to translate them.Then I'll ask some of you to read your translation.

高一英语课件(篇4)

作者：贺莉自：本站原创点击数：581 文章录入：helen

Teaching plan for SB1A Unit 9 Technology

Teaching goals: Talk about science and technology

Describe things and how they work

Express agreement and disagreement

Use the present Continuous Passive Voice

Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of modern technology

Write a letter to Q12 about love and friendship

Time arrangement:

Period 1 Warming up, listening, speaking

Period 2 Pre-reading, reading, post-reading

Period 3 Intensive reading

Period 4 Language study

Period 5 Integrating skills

Period 6 Workbook (Talking and Reading)

Period 7 Test

Period one ( listening and speaking )

Warming up

Step I Brainstorming about Technology

1. Is technology important to us? What will you think of when talking about technology?

2. What qualities shall we have if we want to have advanced technology?

( to be creative , good at solving problems and thinking in new ways )

Step II Activity

( Bring the items of a toothpick, plastic bag and left-handed glove if possible)

(Hold a competition of creativity among groups of students if necessary)

1. Students work in groups to solve the problems

2. Compare different solutions and talk about creativity.

Listening

Step I Introduction

1. Describe an everyday object for Ss to guess. (color/ size/ shape/ use etc.)

Step II listening

1. First-listening: what is being described?

2. Second-listening: what can the things be used for?

3. Discussion in pairs: what are the new uses for the objects in addition to the “normal” uses?

Step III A riddle-guessing competition

1. Read the instruction and the guided questions

2 Do a demonstration with a student.

Teacher: You seem to have something in your pocket. What does it look like?

Student: It looks like … ….

T: What is it made of ?

S: It’s made of …….

T: What is it used for ?

S: … … …

3 Ss practice in pairs

4 Competition--- Who can guess it ?

One student thinks of or hides an object in his pocket, while the rest raise questions to guess what it is.

Speaking

Step I Brainstorming

1. Present the situation

2. Brainstorming about the advantages and disadvantages about cellphones

Step II Expressions of agreement and disagreement

Teach new expressions

1) Absolutely= Definitely= Exactly

2) It depends.

3) That’s a good point.

4) That’s worth thinking about.

Step III Activity

1. Ss works in groups and prepare a role play.

2. Ss present their dialogues.

3. Debate: Players from different groups debate the advantages and disadvantages of a cellphone.

Homework: 1. Listening : Workbook P133 Listening Ex 1&2

2. Speaking: Interview your parents the way of life 30 years ago ( Were there telephones , TVs or computers ? )

3. Thinking : P60 Ex 3 Design your cellphone--- to be creative!

Period Two ( extensive reading )

Revision

Check the listening homework on page 133.

Pre-reading

Step I Discussion (Question 2 of Pre-reading )

1. Check the speaking homework of interview

How did people live 30 years ago?

What did people do at night without electricity?

How have inventions and new technology changed our way of life?

2. Talk about the title---Life on the go

Life on the go refers to a fast-paced lifestyle where people are always on the go---rushing from one place to another, doing many things at once, and using cellphones, computers, etc.

Reading

Step I Presentation

1. Talk about the cellphone and present the new vocabulary.

( Ask Ss to bring cellphones of different brands to class if possible)

Questions: What functions does a cellphone have?

What features does your cellphone have? etc.

Vocabulary: function, feature, image, an electronic calendar, remind ,appointment

2. The top question:

Why are cellphones so popular with teenagers according to the passage?

Step II Reading

1. Skimming for the top question.

2. Some T or F statements to check the general understanding of the passage.

3. Scanning for the main idea of each paragraph, comparing general statement and specific statement. ( Post-reading Ex 2 on Page 60 )

Step III Activity

1. Discussion in pairs ( Post-reading Ex 1 on Page 60 ).

2. Design your own cellphone in groups.

Homework: 1. Read the text after the tape, marking the difficulties.

2. Reading comprehension: WB page 136.

Period Three ( intensive reading )

Revision

Revise the text .

Language points

Vocabulary

1. depend v. dependent adj. independent adj.

1) That depends. = It depends. = I’m not completely sure.

2) depend on 依赖，信任，取决于

e.g. His family depends on him.

We’re depending on you to finish the job by Friday.

Happiness often depends on your attitude to life.

2. add v.

1) 增加，相加，补充说

e.g. Add a few more names to the list.

If you add 5 and 3 you get 8.

I should like to add that we are pleased with the result.

2) add to = to increase something

e.g. The rise in electricity costs has added to our difficulties.

3) add up to = amount to

e.g. These numbers add up to 100.

3. remind v.

remind sb to do sth.

of sth.

that –clause

e.g. Remind me to write to Dave.

This hotel reminds me of the one we stayed in last year.

She reminded me that Sue was in Paris.

4. touch n.

get in touch with sb. lose touch with sb.

stay in touch with be in touch with

keep in touch with be out of touch with

5. call v.

call for = to demand sth. , to collect sb.

call at some place = visit some place

call on sb. = to visit sb., to ask sb. to do sth.

call in = to ask sb. to come in{

e.g. Students are calling for more spare time and less homework.

I'll call for you at 8 o'clock.

I think we'd better call in a doctor.

I called on my uncle while I was in London.

6. case n.

in case in this case

in case of + n./pron in any case

in case --clause in no case = never

e.g. The meeting will be put off in case it rains.

In case he arrives before I get back, please ask him to wait.

In case of fire, ring the bell.

I don't think I need any money, but I'll bring some in case.

In no case should we give up dreaming about a better future.

7. need n.

[U] 缺乏；需要

[C] 需要得东西；必需品

in need of sth.

no need for sth.

e.g. There’s a growing need for new housing in big cities.

She didn’t earn enough money to satisfy all her needs.

We’re collecting money for children in need.

Please come to me if ever you’re in need of help.

There’s no need for you to say sorry to me.

Sentence patterns

1. Cellphones make it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere.

e.g. I think it necessary for her to stay in touch with her parents .

He found it possible for them to improve the working condition.

Our school makes it a rule for us to have an English Corner every Friday.

2. We have a need to stay in touch with friends no matter where we are or what we are doing.

e.g. Nobody believed him no matter what he said.

No matter where he goes, the thief can’t escape being caught.

She always goes swimming no matter how cold it is.

3. She says that her cellphone helps her do whatever she wants to do.

e.g. Whatever you do, wherever you go, I’ll be right here waiting for you.

She always goes swimming, however cold it is.

Homework: 1. WB page 134-135 Vocabulary Ex1,2,3&4

Period Four ( Language study )

Word study

Step I Page 61 Match the words with their meaning

Step II Check the homework on page 134-135.

Step III Reading for meaning ---guessing the words from the clues.

Page 63 Tips Are you a smart reader?

Grammar

The passive voice (3) --- The Present Continuous Passive Voice

Step I Study the examples

am/ is/ are + being + done

Step II Practice ( page 61 )

Step III Activity

Two students put on a performance of “双簧”.

The door is being pushed open slowly and quietly. A chair is being taken into the room and put at the desk. A piece of paper is being taken out of his pocket. The chair is being cleaned. Now he is sitting down. And some books are being moved to the side of the desk. The schoolbag is being opened, and an English book is being taken out…….

Homework: 1. WB page 136 Grammar 1&2

Period Five ( integrating skills )

Reading

Step I Reading

What is the computer Q12 like ?

How does it control human beings?

What other suggestions will you make to solve the problem?

What will the earth be like if Q12 understands love and friendship?

Step II Language points

1 take over 接管

e.g. The company has been taken over by a American firm.

Sarah will take over my job when I leave.

2 break down （机器）不运转；失败；

break up 结束；（关系）破裂

e.g. The car broke down on the motorway.

The peace talks between the two countries have broken down

The meeting broke up after only half an hour.

Their relationship wasn’t working, so they decided to break up.

3 come up with = to think of or suggest an idea 想出办法，提出建议

e.g. He couldn’t come up with an answer.

How have you come up with such a good idea?

4 success in manage to do sth.

sucessful in

succeed in doing sth. fail to do sth.

e.g. We had no success in finding a new flat.

Jane finally succeeded in passing the her driving test.

Writing

Step I Study the outline of the letter

Step II Students have a discussion in pairs.

Step III Ask a student to give a sample letter orally.

Homework: 1. write a letter to Q12

Period Six ( WB talking and reading )

Talking

WB page 134 Talk about modern technology.

Step I Read the situation

Step II Activity

Ss work in groups

First list the advantages and disadvantages of the inventions of cellphones, robots and computers.

Then Ss have a debate in groups.

Step III Debate

Have 3 debates between groups.

( There are speakers representing each group, and the rest are judges)

Reading

WB page 136 Reading Future travel: teleportation

Step I Fast reading and skimming

What does teleportation mean?

Step II Scanning

How is teleportation different from normal transportation?

Why is it so difficult to teleport human beings?

Step III Reading for words

Match the words with the best strategy on page 137.

Step IV Activity

Discussion : Will teleportation be realized?

Think of more impossible things that may be possible in the future.

高一英语课件(篇5)

【知识网络】

一、重点词汇与短语

1．recognize的用法小结：

（1）to know again (somebody or something ) that one has seen (or heard, etc) before 认出

I recognized Peter although I hadn't seen him for 10 years.

虽然我有没看到彼得了，但我认出了他。

I don't recognize this word -- what does it mean?

我不认识这个单词，它的意思是什么？

Many fail to recognize that all these things are in danger of denied.

许多人没有看到这一切正处于失去的危险之中。

（2）to accept as a fact; to admit承认；认可常用于以下结构：

recognize + object

recognize somebody to do something

recognize somebody as …

recognize + that从句

to recognize a new government

承认一个新政府

We all recognize him to be clever.

我们都承认他是非常聪明的。

We recognize that country as an independent state.

我们承认那个国家是一个独立的国家。

He didn’t recognize that he was wrong.

他不承认他错了。

（3）be prepared to admit or be aware of (something.); realize. 认清（某事）；认识到

He recognized his lack of qualifications/that he was not qualified for the post.

他认识到自己不够条件/没有资格担任那个职务。

2．marry的用法小结：表示“ 结婚；娶；嫁”的意思。

（1）marry为及物动词，宾语是somebody，不能加任何介词；而且是瞬时动词，不能与一段时间连用。

例如：

I am going to marry John. 我要和约翰结婚了。

（2）词组 somebody be married to somebody表示已婚的状态，这时可以与一段时间连用。例如：

Mary has been married to John for two years. 玛丽与约翰已结婚两年了。

（3）词组somebody get married to somebody表示的是瞬间的动作，不可与一段时间连用。

She got married to him last year. 她去年与他结婚了。

（4）词组 marry somebody to somebody: 使结婚；嫁（女）;把…嫁给…

He married his daughter to a businessman. 他把女儿嫁给了一个商人。

（5）主持…婚礼

The priest married them. 牧师主持他们的婚礼。

（6）“嫁给一个有钱人”可以有以下说法：

marry a man with a lot of money

marry a rich man

marry a fortune

marry well

3．worth的用法小结：

（1）后面跟表示“钱”的名词，意思是“值多少钱”。

例如：

How much is this bicycle worth? It's worth ￡50.

这辆自行车值多少钱？值50英磅。

（2）“值得…的”，可以用-doing这种主动形式表示被动的意义。

例如：

This book is worth reading. 这本书值得读。

This watch is worth repairing. 这只表值得修理。

（3）需要加强语气时，worth前可以用well，但不可以用very。

例如：

The film is very exciting. It is well worth seeing again.

这部电影很令人振奋。很值得再看一遍。

（4）it可以作be worth的形式主语。

It isn’t worth getting angry with him.

=He is not worth getting angry with.

犯不上跟他生气。

注意：（1）worthy后面要用“介词of + 动词-ing形式的被动式”或者“不定式的被动式”，表示“值得…的”。

例如：

This novel is worthy of being read a second time. = This novel is worthy to be read a second time. （这本小说值得再看一遍。）

（2）worthwhile也表示“值得…的”。要注意此结构：

It is worthwhile reading the novel a second time. ( 这本小说值得再读一遍 )

4．“祈使句＋ and /then /or /otherwise + 陈述句”结构的用法：

在此结构中，前两个起连接作用的词表示顺接关系，后两个表示逆接关系；前面的祈使句相当于一个条件状语从句，而陈述句表示结果；可以转换为带有条件状语从句的复合句；转换时要注意连接词的使用。

例如：

Work harder and/then you will succeed in your studies. （注意：此句中and和then只能用一个，不能一起使用。）

=If you work harder, you’ll succeed in your studies.

（如果你更加努力学习，在学习方面你就会成功。注意：and和then可以互换，只能用其中一个。）

Study hard, or/otherwise you’ll fail in your exams.

=If you don’t study hard, you’ll fail in your exams.

（如果你不刻苦学习，你就会考不及格。）

二、词义辨析

1．accept, receive与take的区别：

receive, accept, take这三个词都有“接受”的意思。

（1）receive表示被动地接受。

例如：

Then he smiled and told me I would receive an extra ￡100 a year!

后来他笑了，并且告诉我说，我将一年收到一百英镑的额外收入！

If you receive a request like this, you cannot fail to obey it!

如果你收到这样的一种请求，你不会不服从的！

A baby can only receive sense impressions, but it does not understand them.

婴儿只能接受感官方面的印象，而不能理解。

（2）accept总表示主动而且高兴地接受。

例如：

Please accept my apologies. 请接受我的歉意。

The villagers have told him that they will not accept the inn even if he gives it away.

村民们告诉他说，即使他把那小酒店白送给人家，也没有人会接受的。

She has received his present, but she will not accept it.

她收到了他的礼物，但她是不会接受的。

There is no accepted theory to explain the phenomenon.

没有公认的理论来解释这种现象。

（3）take所表示的接受包含着有人赠给的意思。

例如：

Did you take his advice? 你接受了他的建议了吗？

He takes anything he is given. 给他什么他就要什么。

（4）receive还表示“接待、接见”的意思。

例如：

The hotel is now open to receive guests. 这家旅馆现在开业接待客人了。

2．after all, above all, at all, in all

（1）after all: 置于句首时表示提醒对方注意，常翻译成“别忘了”；置于句末时表示“与预料的情况相反”。

例如：

Don’t be too strict with him. After all, he is only a child.

对他不要过于严格。别忘了，他还只是个孩子。

I thought I would fail in the last exam, but I passed, after all.

我原以为上次考试我会不及格，但是没有想到我竟然及格了。

（2）above all: 首先，重要的是。

例如：

Above all, I love taking a walk every evening.

首先，我喜欢每天晚上散步。

（3）at all:常用于否定句和疑问句，表示加强语气。常翻译成：“根本、丝毫”等。

例如：

I'm not at all sorry I came, I'm glad! 我来了一点也不遗憾，我很高兴。

There was nothing at all to eat. 根本就没有什么东西吃。

Are you at all worried about the forecast? 你对这项预报不担一点心吗？

（4）in all: 意思是“总计”。

例如：

There were twelve of us in all for dinner. 我们一共12人吃饭。

三、重点句型

1．I’d rather not tell you.

注意：somebody would rather do something表示“某人宁愿做某事”；它的否定句表示“某人还是别…”。

例如：

I would rather go there by bus. (我宁愿坐公共汽车去那里。)

I would rather not sit there doing nothing. (我不愿坐在那里什么都不做。)

2．on’t touch anything, unless your teacher tells you to.

unless引导的从句有时可以和if引导的否定条件句互换，此句可以改成：…, if your teacher doesn’t tell you to. 另外要注意句末的to后省略了touch something。

再如：

I won’t go with you unless you tell me who will be with us.

如果你不告诉我谁将和我们一起，我就不会和你一起去。

3．here’s no doubt that 100 years ago animal testing was cruel but today animals in experiments are very well taken of.

此句中There’s no doubt that…为固定句型，意思是“毫无疑问”。

再如：

There is no doubt that he is our model in work. 毫无疑问，他是我们工作中的模范。

四、语法复习

情态动词must, can/could, may/might表示推测、猜测、可能的用法。

1．表示对所发生的事情或情景作出“很肯定”的推测时，肯定式用must，否定式用can’t，意思是“一定，想必；不可能”。

例如：

The new term has just started. She must be very busy preparing her lessons.

新的学期刚刚开始。她现在一定是忙于备课。

They can’t be at home now. It is now 10 o’clock. They must be in the office.

他们现在不可能在家。现在是10点钟。他们一定在办公室。

2．表示对当前发生的事或者情况作出较有可能的推测时用can，相当于“可能是、也许会、会”。

例如：

It can be true.

这可能是真的。

Watching TV for a long time can damage your eyes.

看电视的时间长有可能损伤你的视力。

3．表示对当前发生的事或者情况作出“不太肯定”的推测时，用may/might/could，相当于“也许、有可能”。Might和could不是表示过去，它们和may一样，都表示“现在的推测”，但是语气较委婉，或者表示可能性更小一些。

例如：

George hasn’t come yet. He may/might/could busy today.

乔治还没有来。他今天可能忙。

I can’t see clearly. There may/might/could a person in the darkness.

我看不清楚。黑暗中可能有个人。

【考点透视考例精析】

[考点] 考查情态动词can的用法。

[考例1] How ______ you say that you really understand the whole story if you have covered only part of the article? （上海，29）

A．can B．must C．need D．may

[解析] A can用于疑问句或否定句中表示惊异、不相信等，意思是“可能、能够”。在此句中，can表示惊异的感情色彩。

[拓展] “can”表达一定的感情色彩的句子在口语中是很常见的。

再如：

How can you say that? After all, you are a student now, and you should study hard.

你怎么能够那么说？别忘了，你现在是个学生，你应该努力学习。

[考点] 考查表“发生”的词组的用法区别。

[考例2] An accident ___________ in the street. ____________ happened to me that I was on the spot.

A．took place, It B．happened, That C．happened, It D．broke out, That

[解析] C 本句牵扯到表示“发生”意义的词组的区别。Take place表示“必然、自然地发生”；happen表示“意外发生”；break out表示“（火、战争、瘟疫等）爆发”。从第二个句子的结构来看，that引导的从句为真正的主语，前面用形式宾语it来代替。所以选择答案C。

[考点] 本题考查推测结构的否定用法。

[考例3] –I heard they went skiing in the mountains last winter.（NMET北京，31）

--It ________ true because there was little snow there.

A．may not be B．won’t be C．couldn’t be D．mustn’t be

[解析] C couldn’t be true表示“这件事不可能是真的”。“There was little snow”说明了原因。

[考点] 本题考查否定转移时反意疑问句的用法。

[考例4] Maybe you’ve made a mistake. I don’t think he knows you, _________?

A．don’t you B．do I C．does he D．doesn’t he

[解析] C I/we don’t think后面跟宾语从句时，出现了“否定转移”现象，其反意疑问句应该根据从句来变。

【基础演练】

一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。

1．They c_______ you just to get in the night club.

2．The operation p_______ a complete success.

3．The work is so important that you must be careful enough not to make any mistake. Even a small one may c______ you your job.

4．All schools are under the c_______ of the Ministry of Education.

5．He earned 200,000 dollars in only one month. Of course he was a s____________ businessman.

6．Sometimes a few words of c_____ to the one who has just failed may encourage him to stand up.

7．This new model is of high _________ （质量）and is not expensive either.

8．According to the weather report, the weather will ________（继续） fine till this weekend.

9．At the end of an hour's play the ________（优势） lay definitely with him.

10．I am ________（肯定） that I gave you his address.

二、单项填空：

1．Let’s keep to the point or we _______any decisions. (NMET I)

A． will never reach B．have never reached

C．never reach D．never reached

2．–Isn’t that Ann’s husomebodyand over there? (NMET 2004 I)

--No, it __________ be him. I’m sure he doesn’t wear glassed.

A．can’t B．must not C．won’t D．may not

3．The mayor of Beijing says that all construction work for the Beijing Olympics ________ by . (北京卷 2004)

A．has been completed B．has completed

C．will have been completed D．will have completed

4．–Who’s that speaking?

--Mathilde Loisel.

--Mathilde! Oh, yes. Sorry. I __________ your voice.

A．didn’t know B．don’t know C．didn’t recognize D．don’t recognize

5．Of all the books on the desk，________ is of any use for our study. [06 四川卷]

A．nothing B．no one C．neither D．none

6．Listen! There’s a lot of noise from next door. They _________ a party.

A．could have had B．must be having C．should have had D．can be having

7．“Put that away _________ it’s broken.” Mum said angrily when Johnny played with the precious vase.

A．unless B．before C．once D．until

8．______ in 1636, Harvard is one of the most famous universities in the United States.

A．Founded B．Founding C．Being founded D．It was founded

9．The police tried to find the _______ child. But without ________ luck, they didn’t find him.

A．lost, a B．missing, / C．losing, a D．missing, /

10．It started _______ and I was beginning _______ how important his decision was that I should take an umbrella.

A．to rain, to realize B．raining, realizing

C．raining, to realize D．to rain, realizing

【能力拓展】

完形填空：

George Pickens had been making a wish daily as a worker at Central Bank.

All over the country banks were being （1） . George thought, （2） this bank? Didn’t robbers hear of its four-million-dollar （3） ? Were they afraid of Mr. Ackerman, the old （4） guard, who hadn’t （5） his gun in twenty-two years?

Of course George had a(an) （6） for wanting the bank to be robbed. （7） , he couldn’t simply take bills that were under his （8） all day long. So he had thought of another （9） to get them. His plan was （10） . It went like this:

If Bank Robber A holds up Bank Teller B…

And if Bank Teller B gives Bank Robber A a certain sum of money…

What is to prevent Bank Teller B from （11） all the money left and （12） that it was taken away by Bank Robber A?

There were only one （13） . Where was Bank Robber A?

One morning George entered the bank. “Good morning, Mr Burrows,” he said （14） . The bank president said something in a （15） voice to George and went into his office.

At two o’clock Bank Robber A walked in. George （16） he was a bank robber. For one thing, he stole in. For another thing, he wore a mask(面罩).

“This is a holdup,” the man said （17） . He took a gun from his pocket. The （18） made a small sound. “You!” the bank robber said, “Lie down on the floor!” Mr Ackerman lay down. The robber stepped （19） to George’s cage.

“All right,” he said. “Hand it over.”

“Yes, sir,” George reached into his drawer and took all the bills from the top part close to six thousand dollars. He passed them through the window. The robber took them, put them into his pocket, and （20） to leave.

Then, while everyone watched Bank Robber A, Bank Teller B calmly lifted off the top part of the drawer and got the bills from the bottom part into his pockets.

1． A．repaired B．broken C．robbed D．built

2． A．Why not B．What about C．How about D．How is

3． A．money B．capital C．note D．bill

4． A．door B．body C．safety D．bank

5． A. pulled out B．got C．carried out D．kept

6． A. chance B．eason C．excuse D．time

7． A．Of all B．In all C．Above all D．After all

8． A．hands B．desks C．drawer D．control

9． A．man B．day C．way D．robber

10． A． perfect B．complete C．easy D．simple

11． A．robbing B．stealing C．keeping D．taking

12． A．telling B．thinking C．insisting D．imagining

13． A．secret B．problem C．thing D．puzzle

14．A．cheerfully B．calmly C．anxiously D．eagerly

15． A．loud B．low C．big D．worrying

16． A．trusted B．recognized C．supposed D．knew

17． A．angrily B．roughly C．firmly D．politely

18． A．robber B．manager C．guard D．customer

19． A．on B．above C．through D．over

20． A．turned B．decided C．signed D．drew

参考答案

高一部分

Units 15-16 (B1)

基础演练

一、1．charged 2．proved 3．cost 4．control 5．successful 6．comfort 7．quality 8．continue 9．advantage 10．positive

二、1-5 AACCA 6-10 BBABA

能力拓展

参考答案与解析：

1-5 CABDD 6-10 BDACD 11-15 CCBAB 16-20 DBCDA

1．C 从全文看来，整篇围绕着抢银行而展开， A. repair修理；B. “破坏”；D. build，建立，均不合题意。

2．A George作为Central Bank的一个员工，所惊奇的是在全国的银行都被抢劫时，为什么独独他所在的银行没有被抢。

3．B capital “资本，资金”，与题意相符。

4．D 在银行，明显为 bank guard，与前文一直提到的rob相照应。

5．A pull out “掏出，拔掉”。这家银行没有被抢劫，难道是因为他们害怕这个二十年没有掏出枪的老保安？

6．B reason 原因；上文说George想让银行被抢，下文便介绍他这种想法出现的原因。

7．D after all “毕竟”； B. in all 总计；C. above all “首先”。George 想得到所有的钱，显然是不可能的，表示退一步来说的，只有选择D。

8．A under one’s hand “在某人指示下，受某人支配、掌握”。

8．C 靠正常工资难以满足George，所以他想到另一条获得大钱的方法。所以是another way。

10．D 从后面的意思看，他的计划应该是“simple”。

11．C “keep something + done”“使…处于某种情况下”。

12．C insist“坚持”，表示强调。

13． B “万事俱备，只欠东风”。George所考虑的步骤有一个仅有的“问题”，即“Where was Bank Robber A?”

14．A cheerfully “欢悦地，高兴地”，与George当时的心情相配，他考虑了整个计划，想着马上就能实现多钱的梦想，自然高兴异常。

15．B in a low voice“以极低的声音”。

16．D 从下文，那个人破门而入，并戴着面罩，他“知道”是个robber，是断定。

17．B roughly“粗鲁地，粗暴地”，正符合robber的身份，符合语言环境。

18．C 显然与robber相对的，guard的作用突显出来。

19．D step over to 表示动作的趋向。

20．A turn to “转身”。Robber抢了钱，肯定是转身离开，扬长而去。

高一英语课件(篇6)

I. Teaching aims and demands学习目标和要求：

ic话题:

1>Talk about science and technology

2>Describe things and how they work

3>Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of modern technology

4>Talk about new inventions

ction功能:

Agreement and disagreement 同意和不同意:

Absolutely. I disagree. / Well, yes, but …

That’s exactly what I was thinking. I’m afraid I don’t agree.

That’s a good point. You can’t be serious.

That’s just how I see it. Well, it depends. That’s worth thinking about.

I would have to disagree with that. Well, I’m not so sure about that.

3.vocabulary词汇:

toothpick, agreement, disagreement, disagree, absolutely, depend, press, teenager, throughout, add, latest, calendar, remind, appointment, behaviour, obey, dare, emergency, whatever, dial, according, unexpected, particular, negative, clone, interview, department, electricity, planet, wonder, defeat, force, peaceful, succeed, skip

stay in touch with, call for, in case (of…), according to, take over, break down

4.grammar语法:

The Present Continuous Passive Voice (3) 被动语态:

1>用英语描述事物正受到某种影响或某种处理-使用现在进行时被动语态(is/are being + 过去分词)。例如：

New functions are being added to the phones.

Michael is being interviewed for the job.

Modern cellphones are being used as camera and radios.

2>用英语描述人物正受到某种影响或某种处理-使用现在进行时被动语态(is/are being + 过去分词)。例如：

The new student is being introduced to the class.

Look! The children are being led into the garden.

5.language usage语言运用

运用所学语言，围绕新科技、新技术和新发明这一话题，完成教材和练习册中的听、说、写的任务；阅读课文 “Life on the go” 并联系生活中的实际，书写一篇目短文。

II. Difficult points 难点

III. Main teaching aids教具: A tape-recorder; Multimedia, projector, role cards

Ⅳ. Main teaching methods 教法:

1. The interaction between the teacher and the students, and among the students themselves; Attention to the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing; and so on.

2. Listening-and–answering activity to help the students go through with the 限listening material.

3. Use both individual work and group or pair work to make every student work and think in class

Ⅴ. Periods: 7-8 periods.

Ⅵ. Teaching procedures 教学过程

Period 1

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

Talk about the teaching plan for this unit and at the same time tell the students the teaching aims and demands. During this period, do WARMING-UP, LISTENING, SPEAKING.

2. WARMING-UP

Introduction This activity provides a good opportunity to talk about creativity and to practise problem-solving skills.

Instruction When the students have solved the problems, ask them how they did it and compare different solutions. Ask the students what creativity is and if it is possible to learn how to be creative.

Answers:

Useful Things Various answers are possible. Encourage the students to think of as many uses as possible. It is not important if the new use is useful in the conventional sense, the emphasis here is on having students explain why / how it will be useful.

Talk box Various combinations are possible. Examples: 1st row left to right: stop, side, soot, stem. 2nd row left to right: coat, code, cram. 3rd row left to right: aide, atom. 4th row left to right: pram, poor. Students can also go right to left and diagonally - the more ways the better. Again, the emphasis is on having students explain their choices and solutions. The activity is not about getting the “right” answer.

True or False Answers: T-F-T. Ask the students how they came up with the answer and encourage them to think of more true or false questions.

Extension Ask the students to come up with more creativity tests.

3. LISTENING

Introduction The students will hear descriptions of everyday objects and are asked to try to guess what is being described. The exercise will be more useful and interesting if you encourage the students to move beyond the obvious uses of the objects described.

Instruction Tell the students to listen to the tape and try to guess what is being described. Before they listen to the tape, you can ask them to describe an everyday object (or you can bring two or three objects and describe them). When the students have listened to the tape and guessed what's being described, they can work in pairs or groups to discuss how the objects can be used. Encourage the students to think of new uses for the objects in addition to the “normal” uses.

Extension Ask the students to think about other objects that either fit the description or can be used for the same things.

LISTENING TEXT:

1 These are very simple. Two sticks, about 20 centimetres long. They are usually made of wood. You hold the two sticks in one hand. You put one stick between two of your fingers, and you hold the other one with your thumb. These things can be difficult to use at first, but you will soon learn how to pick up even small pieces of food.

2 This thing is very popular and useful. Almost everyone has one these days. You can see people using this thing on the bus, when they are walking, or at home. It is usually small, about the same size as your hand, and it comes in many colours. There are several buttons on it, some for numbers, others for other things. It can be put in your pocket or in a small bag. With it, you can talk to people far away.

3 This is a large box with a big door. If you open the door, a light comes on and you can see what's inside. You'd better not leave the door open for too long, because it is not good for the things inside. You might catch a cold, too, if you stand in front of the open door. There are several shelves inside, some in the box itself, some in the door. You usually find this large box. in the kitchen.

Answers to Exercise 1:

Object described Possible uses

I Chopsticks Eating, opening a bottle. Students can think of more creative uses.

2 Cellphone Making phone calls, sending pictures, sending e-mails. Students think of more.

3 Refrigerator Keeping food fresh, keeping drinks cool. Students think of more.

Answers to Exercise 2:

Various answers are possible.

4. SPEAKING

Introduction This group discussion is an opportunity for the students to practise their ability to express, support, and challenge an opinion. Jane wants to buy a cellphone, but before she buys one she wants to know what her parents and her friend think. The students will role-play the discussion.

Instruction Divide the students into groups and explain that they are going to prepare a role play and have a discussion. Each group member will play one of the roles and must prepare a role card. If necessary, you can use one of the role cards as an example. Explain the “rules” of the discussion to the students and remind them of the basic classroom rules.

1 Decide who will play which role. The student who plays Jane will be the group leader.

2 Give the group enough time to prepare the role cards.

3 Check that all group members are ready. Before the students begin the discussion, remind them that Jane should open the discussion and that they should take turns introducing themselves and stating their opinion as outlined in 4 and 5.

4 Jane opens the meeting by welcoming everybody. She also explains why they are meeting and asks everyone to help her make her decision.

5 Each group member introduces himself / herself and states his or her opinion and reasons.

6 When all the group members have introduced themselves and stated their opinions and reasons, the students can continue the discussion as they see fit. They can ask questions, give more examples and reasons, explain their opinions, and debate and challenge other views.

7 Remind the students that each group member must try to make the others agree with him or her.

Possible answers:

Jane

1 I can use a cellpho_e to call my parents if I am late.

2 I can use a cellphone to call for help.

3 I can use a cellphone to stay in touch with my friends. Jane's best friend

1 we don't really need cellphones.

2 we are not allowed to use cellphones in school.

3 it is better to use the money for something more important.

Jane's mother

1 cellphones are too expensive.

2 Jane should not spend too much time on the phone.

3 Jane is too young to have a cellphone. Jane's father

1 if Jane has a cellphone, I can always find out where she is.

2 a cellphone will help Jane feel safe.

3 Jane can use a cellphone send messages to her friends.

Sample discussion:

JANE: Thank you for taking the time to talk with me. Mum, Dad, you know I have told you before that I want to buy a cellphone. I would like to tell you why I want to buy one, and I would like your advice.

DAD: OK, why don't you start and then we will all tell you what we think.

JANE: Thanks, Dad. I think a cellphone is very useful, because I can use it to let you know where I am and when I will be back home. For example, if I have to stay late at school, you might get worried and wonder where I am. If I have a cellphone, I can call you and tell you that I will be late. .

MUM: Well, that's true, but I don't think you should buy a cellphone. In my opinion, a cellphone is too expensive. Besides, if you have a cellphone I think you will spend too much time talking on the phone. You'd better use your time to study instead.

CINDY: I agree with Mrs Collins. Some of the other students in our class have cellphones and they talk on the phone all the time. I don't see how they ever have time for anything else. And it is expensive. One of my classmates said that she spent 110 yuan in one month!

DAD: Jane, I think you are right. I often worry about where you are and I never know when I will be home from work. I remember last year, when you were at the supermarket and I had promised to pick you up. I was late and couldn't find you when I got there. If you have a cellphone I can just call you.

JANE: Thank you for telling me what you think. I will take some time to think about what you have said. Now let's have some fun. How about playing some cards!

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Preview the reading text

2. Learn the new words and expressions by heart.

3. Get ready to be examined in the speaking activities.

Period 2

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the speaking activities.

2. During this period, do some reading.

2. PRE-READING

Introduction The questions are designed to get the students to think about the cellphone as an example of inventions that have changed our way of life.

Instruction Encourage answers and comments that help students think about the way technology affects our life and thinking. The second question will help: students are likely to mention what we do today and compare to what people did in the past. Big inventions would include cars, computers, electricity, etc. The third question will help the students reflect on why some inventions are more popular than others.

Extension Ask the students to think about what “big” inventions have in common. Encourage students to think more about question 3. What are the consequences of “popular” science - will it lead science in the wrong direction?

3. READING

LIFE ON THE GO

Introduction The reading discusses the increasing popularity of cellphones in Chinese society. Cellphones are everywhere and have positive and negative effects on our life. Encourage the students to take a critical view of the cellphone culture, or life on the go, and think about how trends and life-styles are related to science and technology. Note that Wang Mei (the girl in the text) says that cellphones are useful and repeats the reasons we encounter in ads and the media - but in the last paragraph we also learn that she (like most people) actually uses the cellphone for other, perhaps less grand purposes. .

Note Life on the go refers to a fast-paced lifestyle where people are always on the go-rushing from one place to another, doing many things at once, and using portable phones, computers, etc.

Instruction

1 Ask the students to read the rust paragraph quickly to get the main idea of the text.

2 Ask the students to do the following (without reading the text).

A Try to guess what the next paragraph will talk about.

Ask the students what they think and why they think so. Compare different answers.

B Try to guess what the whole text will talk about. Ask the students what they think and why they think so. Compare different answers.

3 Ask the students to use the answers from 2A and 2B to write a simple outline of the text. The students can work in pairs or groups to write the outline.

4 Let the students read the whole text. Ask them to compare their outline with the text and note any differences.

4. POST-READING

Answers to Exercise 1:

1 The title refers to the high pace of modem life and to the fact that portable devices, like cellphones and laptops, are becoming popular.

2 The text lists a couple of reasons: cellphones can distract students in class, cellphones may make students spend more time talking on the phone than doing homework.

3 The text lists two reasons: safety and the cool factor, i.e. the desire to be like others. Students may add other reasons.

4 Students are of course free to agree or disagree. Make sure that the students give reasons for their opinion.

Questions 2 and 3 can be answered by skimming or scanning. For question 1, students may use the pre-reading discussion and their own thinking. The text does include the phrase life on the go, so additional help is available. Question 4 is perhaps best answered after a pair or group discussion.

2 Sample Outline

1 Wang Mei is an example of Chinese teenagers who have cellphones.

2 Cellphones can be used for many things.

For example: talking to people, sending mes5ages and pictures, .playing games, listening to music, keeping appointments

3 Cellphones also cause problems.

1 In school, cellphones may disturb lessons.

2 At home, students may spend too much time and money on phone calls.

4 There are several reasons why teenagers like cellphones.

1 Cellphones help us stay in touch with friends and family.

2 Cellphones make us feel safer.

3 Cellphones are fun and cool.

5 Wang Mei explains why she likes her cellphone and what she uses it for.

3 Various answers are possible.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Read the text fluently.

2. Get LANUAGE STUDY ready.

3. Go on remembering the new words and expressions in this unit.

Period 3

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.

2. LANGUAGE POINTS IN THE READING TEXT

（Omitted.）

3. LANGUAGE STUDY

Word study

Answers to the exercise:

1G 2C 3B 4A 5F 6I 7E 8D 9H

4. GRAMMAR

The Present Continuous Passive Voice:

To form the present continuous passive voice, use is / are being done, which gives the idea that an action is in progress at the moment.

e.g.: Money is being collected for the broadband project.

A report is being written about the negative effects of 'Cellphones in school.

Answers to Exercise 1:

1 Money for the broadband project is being collected.

2 A report about the negative effects of cellphones in school is being written.

3 A computer center for the students is being built.

4 The test-tube baby is being taken good care of by its parents.

5 Human cloning is being studied by some scientists.

6 The laws to protect the rights of women and children are being revised.

Answers to Exercise 2:

1 How much money a month is being spent on their cellphones?

2 What is being produced by this company?

3 Who is being interviewed for the job?

4 What is being sent to his friend's phone?

5 Whom are some programmes being developed for?

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Grasp the language points in the reading text.

2. Finish all the exercises in the Student’s Book.

3. Learn to use the Grammar in this unit.

Period 4

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Check the students on the grammar points.

2. Ask the students to translate some sentences.

2. GRAMMAR EXERCISES

(Omitted.)

3. INTEGRATING SKILLS

Instruction Writing this letter can be difficult as the students will have to struggle with the abstract concepts. Most of them will find it difficult to capture the essence of the abstract terms, but in the process of doing so they will discover useful techniques for conveying their ideas, e.g. giving examples. Acceptable essays should include a rough definition of the two terms (love and friendship), with examples, within the framework of a letter to Q12. Advanced essays should use the definitions / examples to show Q12 that love and friendship are necessary, i.e. advanced essays should use the expository parts to support a persuasive thesis. These are important criteria for assessment. Let the students read the story about Q12 and then write the letter. The students can work individually or in pairs or groups.

Sample writing:

April 3 2374

Dear Q 12,

My name is Xiao Hong and 1 am a middle school student in Dalian. I would like to tell you about two things that 1 think are very important. Please read what 1 have to say, because 1 think it may be helpful to you. 1 want to tell you about love and friendship.

Love is difficult to explain, but 1 will try. Love is a feeling between two people. It is a very happy and warm feeling. When two people love each other, they almost become one person. For example, if a father loves his child, he will feel sad when the child is sad and happy when the childis happy. There are many different kinds of love: you can love your parents or children, you can love your husband or your wife, or you can love someone outside your family.

Friendship is also a kind of love. When two people are friends, they try to understand and help each other. A good friend will be there for you even when you are having a difficult time. Friends do things together and share thoughts, feelings and ideas.

Love and friendship are necessary if we want a happy world. If there is love, people will not do bad things to each other; if we have friends, we won't have to feel lonely or afraid. When people feel lonely and afraid, they often get angry with others and do mean things. If we learn to love and be friends, we can live happily together and solve the problems and difficulties we must face in life.

Your friend,

Xiao Hong

The words “chelyabinsk” and “Irkutsk” may be new to us, but the sentence tells us that they are examples of large Russian cities.

CHECKPOINT

Answers to Checkpoint 9:

A computer centre is being built for the students.

The phones are also being used as cameras and radios. The phones are being used everywhere.

4. LANGUAGE POINTS IN THE READING TEXT

(Omitted.)

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Write a clear and beautiful short passage in the Exercise-book.

2. Preview WORKBOOK.

Period 5

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Have a dictation of some phrases.

2. Say something about the students’ writing.

2. LISTENING

Instruction Tell the students that they will hear about the International Space Station. Ask the students what they know about it and then let them listen to the tape I and complete the informati0n chart.

LISTENING TEXT:

The International Space Station

As you are listening to this, the International Space Station is moving around the Earth. The International Space Station is an international project to build a small city in space. Sixteen countries are working together to build a space station where scientists can conduct experiments and learn more about space and the earth. The sixteen international partners are the United States, Russia, Canada, Japan, Brazil, and the European Space Agency. The United States and Russia are leading the effort but every country is making an important contribution to the ISS.

The International Space Station is made up of several parts and will be about the size of two soccer fields when completed. The different parts will be added one by one. Some parts are laboratories, some are for power sources, and others are for people to live in. The parts will be put together in space. When the new parts have been put together, space station astronauts will perform space walks to connect the parts to the station. The space walks are very dangerous and astronauts must be very careful one small mistake could be deadly! A total of 46 flights

will be necessary to connect the more than 100 parts. If all goes well, the station will be completed in a few years.

Note: The Europen space Agency involves 11 countries: France, Germany, Italy, Switzerland, Spain, the Netherlands, Belgium, Denmark, Norway, Sweden and the UK.

Answers to the exercises:

What is the task of the ISS? It is an international project to build the Internationals Space Station, a small city in space.

How many countries are building the station? 16

How big will the ISS be when finished? About the size of two soccer fields.

How many parts are needed? What will they be used for? More than 100.

Some parts are laboratories, some are for power sources and others are for people to live in.

How is the ISS being built? First, the different parts will be put together in space. Then, the people who work at the space station will take space walks to connect the parts to the station.

How many flights are needed to connect the parts? 46.

When will the project be finished? In a few years.

2 Various answers are possible.

3. TALKING

Instruction Help the students prepare the lists of advantages and disadvantages. You can use one of the examples and let the whole class think of advantages and disadvantages and then write them on the blackboard. If necessary, you can also model one or two “turns” in the debate.

Technology Advantages Disadvantages

Cellphones ●Cellphones help us keep in touch withour friends and family.

●Cellphones help us send e-mails.

● Cellphones help us send photographs and messages.

. ● Cellphones help us… ●Using a cellphone is expensive.

●Overusing it may disturb our work.

●Spending too much time making phone calls. . Cellphones ...

Robots

●Robots can work in dirty and dangerous places.

●Robots can do boring things that humans do not want to do.

● Robots can work without sleep and food. ●Robots can't think or make decisions.

● People may become unemployed if robots are used instead of humans.

●Robots need electricity.

Computers

●Computers help us work faster.

●Computers can help us study and learn.

●Computers can help us solve difficult problems. ●Computers are expensive.

●Computers can't think or make decisions.

●Computers are sometimes difficult to use.

Sample Dialogue:

A: I think that cellphones have many advantages. They help us keep in touch with our friends and family and we can use them to get important information, like news and weather reports.

B: Well, maybe, but there are many disadvantages, too. Cellphones are expensive to buy and use, and people may use them where they shouldn't, like in the classroom. Many people call their friends just for fun and may end spending too much time on the phone.

A: That may be true for some people, but that's not really because of the phones. You could say the same about TV or computers. People shouldn't do too much of anything. Think about all the other advantages. For example, if I'm meeting my Mum at the bus station and she is late, she can call me and let me know so I won't have to worry or get lost. And if I do get lost, or if I'm in danger, I can call for help.

B: ...

4. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Get ready to be examined in the talking activities.

2. Preview all the exercises in the workbook.

Period 6

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the talking activities.

2. PRACTISING

Vocabulary

Answers to the exercises:

1 1 toothpick 2 Teenagers 3 calendar 4 appointment 5 behaviour 6 emergency

7 interview 8 planet

2 1 answer (n) 2 changes (n) 3 defeat (v) 4 touch (n) 5 hand (n) 6 handed (v)

7 change (v) 8 phone (n) 9 forces (v) 10 phoned (v) 11 force (n) 12 answer (v)

13 defeat (n) 14 touch (v)

3 1 C 2C 3B 4A. 5A

4 1 You may do whatever you want to do.

2 I'll teach whoever wants to learn.

3 We can start whenever you're ready.

4 Life won't be easy whichever road you take.

5 He makes friends wherever he goes.

6 It rained throughout the night.

7 In case of rain, they usually go travelling with an umbrella.

Grammar

Answers to the exercises:

1 done, completed, built, have, collecting, planned, collected, spent, made, being improved, planted, painted

2 National day is coming and People's Park is being prepared for it. Look! By the lake, one boat is being repaired and the other one is being. painted. Beside the boats, the trees are being planted and the flowers are being watered. Not far away, the building is being painted and its roof is being repaired...

3. INTEGRATING SKILLS

Reading

FUTURE TRAVEL: TELEPORATION

Introduction The text states that the concept of transportation has remained the same despite advances in science and technology. However, recent discoveries suggest that we may be able to change the way we view transportation. The text defines and explains teleportation and reports advances. in science that have made teleportation seem possible. The discovery is an example of how something once believed to be science fiction (or impossible) is becoming science (or reality). It is important to note that while the discovery described in the text is significant, the teleportation of human beings does not seem possible.

Extension Encourage the students to think about what a concept is and how it changes - or, in other words, how the way we think about the world interacts with what we know about it. Use the Adventure Travel reading in the student's book as an example of another conceptual change.

Answers to the exercises:

1 1 Teleportation is a combination of sending information through telephones or the Internet and transportation.

2 With normal transportation, a person or thing is moved from point A to point B. With teleportation, a person or thing is taken apart at point A and put together again at point B.,

3 Teleporting a human being would be very difficult since there are so many parts in a human body.

4 Various answers are possible. The text does make it clear that it. is very unlikely that human teleportation will become possible.

2 The students are asked to match each new word with the correct strategy. Ask them to scan the text for the word and then decide which strategy they could use to guess the meaning of the word.

Teleportation

Strategy: Some words are made up of two parts. We can use the meaning of each part to guess the meaning of the word.

The text emphasizes the mix of telephone and transportation and the students can use this to conclude that tele has been added to -portation to make up teleportation, meaning a combination of regular transportation and telecommunication.

Photons

Strategy: Some words are explained in the sentence. The explanation is often between commas (,), dashes (-), or brackets ( ).

The explanation is given in brackets in the text (particles that carry light).

Apart

Strategy: We can use words we already know to guess the meaning of words that mean the same or that have the opposite meaning.

The students are already familiar with the phrase put together and can use this knowledge to conclude that apart means the opposite of together.

3 1 People used to think it was impossible to use machines to talk to each other, but it has become possible with the invention of the telephone. In the future, we may even be able to use machines to send our thoughts to other people.

2 People used to think it was impossible to make a copy of a living thing, but it has become possible with the invention of cloning. In the future, we may even be able to clone human beings.

3 People used to think that it was impossible to make a machine that could do math, but it has become possible with the invention of the abacus and the computer. In the future, we may even be able to use machines that can think.

4. WRITING

Instruction Ask the students to think of inventions that have changed the way we live, e.g. the steam engine, electricity, the telephone, the computer, the Internet etc. What will the next big invention be and how will it change our life? The students are free to come up with their own ideas. Remind the students that they should give the new invention a name, explain (roughly) how it works or what it is, how it will be used (or what it will be used for) and how it will change our life.

Sample writing:

The Thinkuter

I think that the next big thing, the next important invention, will be a computer that can actually think. I don't mean that this computer will be like a human being - it will not be able to come up with its own ideas

but it will be able to help us think. The computers we use today can only do very simple things, like adding and subtracting, or storing and recalling information. The new machine will be able to do things that we do when we think. Since it is a computer that can think, I will call it a thinkuter.

If we have thinkuters, we can do things that used to be impossible. For example, today, with normal computers, only a few very smart people can solve important problems. And even these experts can only solve the problems in the same way. With a thinkuter, we would be able to think in new ways and change the way we understand life, science, and nature. A thinkuter would give us more thinking power and we would be able to do more with our ideas. Everybody has lots of good ideas, even children do, but it is difficult to turn one's ideas into reality. If people had thinkuters, they could use their ideas better - no idea would be wasted.

With thinkuters, we would also need to spend less time in school. We could learn more and faster. School is good for us and we need it, but if we could learn more and faster, we would have more time to do other things that are also important.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Finish all the exercises in this UNIT.

2. Finish the supplementary exercises given by the teacher.

Period 7

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

2. GOING OVER SUPPLIMENTARY EXERCISES

3. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

Period 8

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

2. GOING OVER NEW WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS IN UNIT 2

3. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

高一英语课件(篇7)

on Australia’s famous beaches 在澳大利亚著名的海滩上

explore the amazing Brazilian rainforest 探索令人惊异的巴西雨林

6. think of想到, 考虑;

8. be busy doing sth忙于做…

14. my supplies of food and water 水和食物的供给

18. can’t wait to do sth. 等不及做某事

27. remember to boil the water 记得去烧开水

34. three pieces of information 三条信息

35. be filled with the wonders of nature 充满了大自然的奇迹

36. at the foot of the mountain 在山脚

45. in perfect harmony with协调一致; 相配

1. on Australia’s famous beaches

_________________________________

2. explore the amazing Brazilian rainforest

_________________________________

3. in detail _________________________

4. go travelling _____________________

5. challenge yourself _____________________

6. think of _____________________

7. so long _____________________

8. be busy doing sth____________________

9. go to university _____________________

10.through the Sahara _____________________

11. in case_____________________

12. take six days _____________________

13. in advance_____________________

14. my supplies of food and water

15. even though _____________________

16. up close _____________________

17. make sure that_____________________

18. can’t wait to do sth.

19. of one’s own _____________________

20. look forward to _____________________

21. it is worth doing _____________________

22. take extra clothes _____________________

23. remind sb. of sth. _____________________

24. make a fire _____________________

25. lose one’s way _____________________

26. in the open air _____________________

27. remember to boil the water _____________________

28. be in progress _____________________

29. places of interest _____________________

30. arrange to do sth. _____________________

31. set off_____________________

32. than usual _____________________

33. in total silence _____________________

34. three pieces of information _____________________

35. be filled with the wonders of nature _____________________

36. at the foot of the mountain _____________________

37. a little bit _____________________

39. first name _____________________

40. on a business trip _____________________

41. be tired of _____________________

42. be covered with _____________________

43. at a loss _____________________

44. be home to … …_____________________

45. in perfect harmony with_____________________

46. make use of _____________________

高一英语课件(篇8)

cultural represent ruin burn unite period stone damage ancient project official population breath limit sincerely Pyramid include restore rebuild beauty photograph portrait recreate artist vase brick cave carbon

Spoken English:

1. Giving advice & Make suggestions

What shall we …? Maybe we could …

Shall we …? I’d like to …

Can’t we …? What/how about …?

Should we …? Why don’t you …?

Let’s … Why not …?

1. 描述事物已经受到某种影响或某种处理--使用现在完成时被动语态。例如：

Now, after years of hard work, parts of statues have been put back together and missing pieces have been replaced.

2. 描述人物已经被动地接受某种行为或某种处理--使用现在完成时被动语态。例如：

The sick woman has been sent to hospital, and now you can’t visit her.

Jack has been told about it, so you needn’t call him up.

Use of Language:

1. Master the function use of language as defined above.

2. Help the students to finish the tasks of listening, reading, writing, speaking presented in the book and the exercise book through using what the students have learned. Learn the text about cultural relics and finish the relative exercises and writing tasks, like write a report on the world’s cultural relics, write a brief introduction of my hometown.

Important points: The use of the Passive Voice

Difficult points: Use of the Passive Voice

Teaching aids: Computer, tape-recorder

Way of Teaching: Communication way of teaching, discussion and group work.

Get the students to look at the pictures in their books: a pyramid in Egypt, the Great Wall in China, and Stonehenge in England. Ask the students to name more sites like these and ask what they have in common.

The answers may be: The pyramids, the Great Wall, the Stonehenge are not only the great places of interest but also the symbols of their countries and their cultures.

First go through the listening part together with the students. Get the students to know what they are going to do.

Name of the site Why is it important? What is being done to protect it?

First get the students to know what they are going to do. Then explain that a “culture capsule” – an imaginary large box – will be sent into space. Ask the students to decide what objects to put in the box. The object should help whoever finds the box understand what and who human beings are. Students can work in pairs or groups. They have to decide what to put in the box and explain why they have chosen them. I.e. how the objects will help explain who we are and how we live.

Help the students to decide they want to put in the box and list the reason .

Fish the exercise in the talking part in their workbooks.

Go over the homework.

List some cities like Beijing, Paris, Chang’an, Rome, then ask the students to discuss these questions with their partners.

1. Some cities, like Paris and Beijing, are called great cities of the world. In your opinion, what makes a city great?

2. What are your favourite cities? Why?

3. What cultural relics are there in the place where you live? How important are they?

First give a brief introduction of the text A City of Heroes.

Read the text fast and tell the following sentences true of false:

1. ( ) The city of St Petersburg was rebuilt by Peter the great.

2. ( ) The Germans attacked St Petersburg a hundred years ago.

3. ( ) A portrait of Peter the Great was destroyed by the Germans.

4. ( ) It was difficult for people to rebuild the old palaces.

5. ( ) Workers and painters used old photographs to help them rebuild the city.

6. ( ) St Petersburg will never be as beautiful as it was before.

The answers are: True: 3 4 5. False: 1 2 6.

First tell the main idea of each paragraph.

Paragraph 1 St Petersburg lies on the banks of the river Lena in Russia. More than three hundred years ago, The Russian Czar, Peter the Great, built a new capital here. Peter the Great was a strong and proud man, and the city reflects his personality.

Paragraph 2 St Petersburg has been the center of many important historical events. These events are the reason why the city has become such an important part of Russian culture and history. The people of St Petersburg fought hard against the Nazis during World War II and were determined to rebuild the city when the Nazis had left it in ruins.

Paragraph 3 Rebuilding the great city was difficult, but the people of St Petersburg succeeded. Using old photographs and rescued pieces of the old city, they managed to restore St Petersburg to its former glory.

Paragraph 4 The people of St Petersburg are heroes because they managed to rebuild the city, proving that they are at least as great as Czar Peter.

Retell the text according to the above main ideas.

Finish the exercise in the Post-reading Part on p46.

Find the sentences using the Present perfect passive Voice.

Check the homework..

Fill in the blanks with the proper words or phrases.

First list some sentences that are used in the Present Perfect Passive Voice.

1. It is true that many of the world’s greatest cities have been built on the banks of a river.

2. Many great palaces were built during his lifetime.

3. Building were destroyed, and paintings and …

4. Pieces of the palaces that had been hidden before the Nazis came could now be used to rebuild the city and its culture.

5. now, after years of hard work, parts of statues have been put back together and missing pieces have been replaced.

6. Old paintings, including a portrait of Peter the Great which was found in the snow outside St Petersburg, have been carefully recreated, and the old palaces have been made as wonderful as in the past.

Then ask the students to find the formation of the Present Perfect Passive Voice:

Ask the students to finish the exercises 1-2 in part 1.

Finish the exercise 2 in their workbooks.

Check the homework.

Ask the students to read the passage in the Integrating Skills part. And they should find the way of a passage formation ---

That is how the passage is structured. The tips in their books may be used as a guide when they are reading.

Ask the students to try to make their writing first orally. In the same while, ask several students to read their passage out and find the place where it may be written in other better way. Then show the students a sample writing and analysis the good of the passage.

Leave the exercise of writing in their workbooks as the homework.

高一英语课件(篇9)

She said, “ They are using PSAs to educate people.”

She said that they were using PSAs to educate people.

“ We must not give up in the face of pressure.” she said.

She encouraged us not to give up in the face of pressure.

Step 2 Direct speech and reported speech (直接引语和间接引语)

He said, ‘I will go to school tomorrow.’

He said that he will go to the school the next day.

She said to me , ‘I am going to London with my father.’

She told me that she was going to London with his father.

She said, “Do you often come here for a visit.”

She asked if I often went there for a visit.

人称变化：

①He said, “I have been to Japan.”

He said that ___ had been to Japan.

②She said, “I'll give you an exam tomorrow.”

She told us that ______ would give ____ an exam tomorrow.

③She asked me, “When do they have their dinner?”

She asked me when _____ had _____ dinner.

She said. ”I have lost a pen.“→

She said. ”We hope so.“ →

She said. ”He will go to see his friend。“→

注意：①The geography teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.”

→

②“I’ll never forget the days in the country.”

③My father said to me, “I read the book in 1986.”

→

④He said to me, “I have taught English since I came here.”

→

代词 this→ 地点状语 here→

状

语 now→ bring→

today→

this week→

yesterday→

last week(month)→

Three day (month) ago→

tomorrow→

next week(month)→

1. ‘I will come and see you again this evening, Tom.’ he said.

2. ‘I will come here again today,’ she said.

The doctor said to the patient, ‘You will have to wait till 3 pm tomorrow.’

1. “I never eat meat.” he said.

He said that ______ never ______ meat.

2. “I’ve found my wallet.” he said to me.

He ______ me that he ______ ______ ______ wallet.

3. “I took it home with me.” she said.

She said that ______ ______ _______ it home with her.

4. The teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and goes down in the west.”

The teacher said that the sun ______ in the east and ______ down in the west.

5. “I met her yesterday.” he said to me.

He ______ me that he ______ met the day ______.

6. “You must come here before five.” he said.

He said that I ______ to go ______ before five.

7. “I bought the house 10 years ago.” he said.

He said that he _______ bought the house 10 years _______.

He said, “I came to see you.”

Tom said, “Do you have any difficulty with English?”

He said, “You are interested in English, aren't you?”

He asked, “Do you speak English or Chinese?”

I asked, “Will you take bus or on foot?”

He said to me，“Where are you from?”

He asked us, “How many factories are there in your country?”

①She said to us, “Please have a break.”

②The teacher said, “Don't smoke in the classroom.”

③The officer said, “Go out!”

She said, “What a lovely day it is.”

1. Our teacher asked us _____ our dictionaries to school.

A. bring B. brought C. bring D. to bring

2. The teacher told the boy students ______ football on the grass.

A. not play B. not to play C. played D. playing

3. Betty asked her sister ____ to the railway station to see her off.

A. not to come B. not to go C. to not come D. to not go

4. The pupil asked his teacher _____ round the earth.

A. whether the moon goes B. that the moon went

C. whether the moon goes D. whether the moon went

5. She asked him ____.

A. whose dictionary this isB. whose dictionary that was

C. whose dictionary is this D. whose dictionary that is

6. Mary’s mother asked her _____.

A. that whether she had finished her homework

B. if she has finished her homework

C. if she had finished her homework

D. that if she had finished her homework

7. Do you know ____?

A. what is he doing B. what he doing

C. what he is doing D. what does he do now

8. I don’t know ____ to learn English.

A. when did he begin B. when he began

C. he when began D. when he begins

9. You can’t imagine ____ when they received these nice Spring Festival presents.

A. how excited they were B. how excited were they

C. how they were excited D. they were how excited

10. Do you remember how many times ____ to Australia?

C. have you beenD. you have been

11. The boss asked his secretary ____ ____he had finished typing the report .

C. whether; or not D. whether; not

12. I wonder how much _____.

A. does he spend on his car B. did he spend on his car

C. he spent on his car D. he spent in his car

高一英语课件(篇10)

Teaching goals

1. Talk about modern agriculture and the effect it has on people’s life.

2. Practice giving advice and making decisions.

3. Learn to use “it” for emphasis.

4. Learn to read statistical graphs.

5. Write a plan for a vegetable garden.

Period 1

Step 1: New words

(listen to the pronunciations of each word and try to remember them).

Step 2:Warming up

1. Look at the graph and tell what the meaning of this graph. It tells the growth of major products 1991-1995 compared with 1986-90 percentages.

2. The production of fruit in 1995 increased by a percentage of 85 compared with 1986.

3. Let the students read the sentences on the screen and learn about some changes and effects between agriculture and people’s life.

4. Ask one students to translate the reading material in the paper(the first and the second passages).

1.What do you think causes these changes? 你认问什么原因引起这些变化的?

2.What do you think the changes in eating habits will have on agriculture or nature? 你认为这些饮食变化对农业和自然会起什么作用？

do you think 是插入语，经常位于疑问词之后

Where do you think our headteacher comes from?

Who do you think the old lady is?

有时也可以放在句尾。

What is it, do you think?

2. effect n. 结果，影响

have an effect on 对…有影响

be of no effect 无效

come／go into effect 开始生效

in effect 在实施中

take effect 见效；生效

bring/carry…into effect 实行；实施

affect v. 影响

effective adj. 有效的

I tried to persuade her, but without effect.

Her new red dress will produce quite an effect on everyone.

她的新红衣服会对大家产生很大影响。

My advice didn't have much effect on him.

The idea is of no effect.

These measures will not be brought into effect until next month.

The law came into effect on October 15.

The medicine didn’t take effect.

Step 3 Listening

1. Show and explain the new words.

2. Listen to the tape.

Step 4 Homework

Prepare oral homework: practice giving advice and making decisions.

Read the reading material (pre-reading)

Period 2

Step 1 Revise the new words.

Step 2 Practise speaking

1. If I were you, I would raise pigs.

2. As far as I can see, 依我看,

3. You want to use the land in the best way possible and do the best for everybody in the village.为了村子里的每个人，你想尽自己最大的努力，以最好的办法来使用这块土地。

possible 与最高级连用，强调“尽可能最…”。

He arrived at the worst possible time.他到达的时间，说多糟就有多糟.

The rocket traveled at the highest speed possible. 火箭以最大的速度飞行

Period 3

Step 1: Revision (new words)

Step 2. Pre-reading

1.Skimming

T: “ What’s the title of the reading passage?

Ss: “modern agriculture”

T: “ What does it mean in Chinese? ”

Ss: “现代农业”

T: “ How to say ‘传统农业’in English ? ”

Ss: “ traditional agriculture. ”

T: “ Can you imagine what traditional agriculture is like? ”

Ss: …

② let Ss read the text firstly and answer the following questions:

How much land can be used for faming in China?

(Seven percent of the land.)

What is the advantage and disadvantage of chemical fertilization?

(it helps to produce better crops. But is harmful to the environment.)

What is the biggest problem of Chinese farmers?

(The shortage of arable land.)

3. Skipping

Let Ss read the passage for the second time and answer two questions:

What does “GM” stand for?

(“G” stands for “genetically” from the word “genes”. “M” stands for “modified”, which means “changed”.)

What is the advantage of tomatoes which were using technique known as “GM”?

(The tomatoes are bigger and healthier. They can grow without danger from diseases. They also need much less time to get ripe.)

Innovations改革 Problems Advantages

Chemical fertilisers Shortage of arable land Bigger and better crops

Pumps for irrigation Weather conditions Bigger and better crops

Special seedbeds Shortage of arable land More crops in one year

Machines e.g. tractors How to make production cheaper (not in the text) Bigger crops on more land by fewer hands

International exchange Lack of knowledge Learn from other people

Greenhouses Weather condition Bigger and better crops

Greenhouses (roots in water tanks) Shortage of arable land More crops in one year

GM technique (can grow in poor soil) Shortage of arable land Can grow in poor soil; bigger & healthier; less time to ripe

4. Listening

Let Ss listen to the tape and follow it.

5. Discussion

①let Ss work in groups and imagine what other changes have happened on farms in the last 100 years.

② let Ss discussion the following questions

1.At the beginning of the passage, why does the writer say “It is on the arable land that the farmers produce food for the whole population of China”?

2. What does the writer want to tell us by saying, “Not only food production is important but also taking care of the environment.”?

3. What can we infer from the sentence “In China about one hundred research stations are now doing GM research to make better tomatoes, cotton…?”

4. What can you imagine about the future of food production?

Step IV Post-reading

Finish the exercises in Students Book, page 46, Exercise 1-2

Step V. homework

Workbook exercises

The reading materials.

Period 4

Step I Revision

Step II word study

Finish the exercises in Student book, page 47.

Step III Practice

Let Ss finish the exercises “vocabulary, 1-3” in page 108, Workbook

Step IV Grammar

1. Give Ss some sentences to translate into Chinese and find out difference and sameness among these sentences (slide show)

It is on this arable land that the farmers produce food for the whole population of china.

It was from the early 1990s that scientists started to develop new techniques to increase agricultural production without harming the environment.

It was they who/that cleaned the classroom yesterday.

It was in the street that I met her father.

It was the goat’s eyes that he had seen in the darkness.

2. Teach Ss to find out the phrase from the sentence above----It is+被强调部分+that/who…

Translate the following sentences into English:

1.写这本书的人就是玛丽。It is Mary who wrote this book.

2.这个就是长满了美丽的鲜花的花园。It is garden that many beautiful flowers grow in.

3.她就是擅长唱歌的女孩。It is a girl who is good at singing.

4.那就是他叔叔移居纽约的季节。It was for this reason that his uncle moved out of New York.

5. 错的人是我。 It is I who am wrong.

4. Note:

a. 在强调句型中，若被强调部分指人，可以用关系代词who或that；若被强调的是状语，只能用that，不能用when或where。

b. 注意与“It is /was…that +clause”主语从句的区别。

强调句型与it作形式主语，that从句作真正主语十分相似，但主语从句中It is /was后通常用名词或形容词作表语。强调句型中It is /was后是对主语、宾语或状语的强调成分。

5. Let Ss find out some sentence with ‘it’ in the text ‘Modern Agriculture’.

6. Exercises

Let Ss finish the exercises in Student’s book, page 47-48, Exx 1-2.

Let Ss finish the exercises in Workbook, page 109, Exx 1-3.

Finish all the exercises in the book.

Period 5

Step I Reading

1. Let Ss look at the picture and briefly introduce Jia Sixie,

2.skimming: let Ss read the text and find out the information about Jia Sixie (slide show)

Where/born: Yidu, Shandong Province

when/live: Six century AD

where/work: Gaoyang, Shandong Province

what/do: study the science of farming

what book/write: Qi Min Yao Shu

the book/about: both the farming and gardening

the importance of the book: an important summary of the knowledge of farming

3.listening: let Ss listen to the tape and follow it, then finish the exercises (slide show)

True or false:

1.China was the earliest research center for agriculture. ( T )

3.Qi Min YaoShu includes advice on the following subjects: growing green vegetables and fruit trees, keeping cows and sheep, and there are also instructions for making metals. ( F )

4.The spring ploughing should be deeper than the autumn ploughing. ( F )

5.We should plant rice in the same field year after year. ( F )

6.We’d better grow different plants next to each other in the same field. ( T )

Step II Writing

1. Write a plan for a vegetable garden, using the tips in the book, page 49.

2. Read in the reading paper “A plan for a vegetable garden”

3. Assign it as written homework.

Period 6

Step 1 Revision (new words and language points)

Step 2 listening practice

1. Make the students understand what they are going to hear about and what they should do.

2. Play the tape for them to listen twice or three times.

3. Check their answers with the whole class.

Step 3 Workbook exercises

1. Check their answers to the vocabulary exercises and grammar exercises.

Step 4 Homework

Assign TALKING as oral homework

Period 7

Step 1 Revision

Step 2 Workbook

ntinue to do the exercises

Step 3 Reading

1. Allow the students a few minutes to read the introduction about the text in the reading paper.

2. Listen and Read the text “Greening the Hills”.

3. Let the students raise their questions about their difficulties.

4. Discuss the problems in the exercises. Ex 1 and Ex 2. (Answers are shown on the screen).

Step 4. Writing

1. Let the students read the introduction about the writing

2. Let the students read the short passage in the textbook.

3. Make the students understand what and how they should write.

4. Assign it as written homework in exercise books. (Read the sample essay in the reading paper, which may be of some help to the students with their writing).

高一英语课件(篇11)

1．manage 的用法小结：

（1）经常用作及物动词，意思是“管理；处理；支配”。常接名词作宾语。

例如：

He managed the supermarket when the owner was away.

当主人不在的时候，他管理这个超级市场。

She doesn’t know how to manage her children.

她不知道如何管理自己的孩子。

（2）表示“能应付，设法做成某件事”时，常用“manage to do sth.”结构，而且常用一般过去时态。

例如：

The pilot managed to circle the balloon for some time.

这位飞行员设法绕气球飞了一阵。

At first, no ready technical data were available, but we managed to go without.

起初,我们没有现成的技术资料,但也设法照样干下去了。

He managed to avoid an accident. 他设法避免了一场事故。

（3）manage to do sth. 与try to do sth.的区别：前者强调设法完成了某件事情，表示结果等于词组“succeed in doing sth.”；而后者强调尽力去做某件事情，表示动作;相当于“do one’s best to do sth”。

例如：

We managed to get there on time.

We tried to get there on time.

2． ahead的用法小结：

（1）作为副词使用，ahead表示“在前；向前；提前”的意思。

例如：

Walk straight ahead until you reach the river. 一直朝前走到河边。

The road ahead was full of cattle. 前面的路上挤满了牛群。

（2）“ahead of”的意思是“在…之前，超过”。

例如：

Our company is ahead of other makers of spare parts for the airplane.

我们公司制造飞机零部件比别家的业绩好。

He is ahead of his times in his ideas. 他的思想走在时代的前列。

（3）get ahead表示“前进，成功，发迹”。

例如：

He got ahead in his study.

他在学习方面成功了。

（4）go ahead表示“前进，干吧，用吧”。

例如：

--May I borrow your bike?

（1）match多指大小、色调、形状、性质等方面的搭配。

例如：

They are equally matched in their knowledge of Chinese.

他们在中文的造诣上相等。

This hotel can't be matched for friendliness.（引申意义）

这家旅馆良好的服务态度是无与伦比的。

（2）suit多指合乎需要、口味、性格、条件、地位等。

例如：

That'll suit me fine. 那对我太合适了。

No dish suits all tastes. 众口难调。

（3）fit多指尺寸、形状合适，引申为“吻合、协调”。

例如：

Her new coat didn't fit, so she took them back to the shop and changed them for another one.

“她那件上衣不合穿,所以她去商店换了一件。”

Your trousers fit well. 你的裤子很合身。

The shoes don't fit him, they are too small.

这双鞋子他穿不合脚，太小了。

2．unlike与dislike、like的区别：

（1）unlike可以作介词和形容词，意思是“不相似的、不同的”。

例如：

She is unlike her mother; she is tall and her mother is very short.

她不像她妈妈；她很高，而她妈妈很矮。

They gave unlike accounts of the incident.

他们对这件事情的描述各不相同。

（2）dislike可以用作动词和名词，但不能用作介词，是“不喜爱、厌恶”的意思。

例如：

Some people dislike big cities. （作动词）

有些人不喜欢大城市。

She strongly disliked being spoken to like that. （作动词）

她很不喜欢别人对她这样说话。

I felt a strong dislike of the new teacher. （作名词）

我感到很不喜欢这个新教员。

（3）dislike与like不同。后接动词时，dislike习惯上只接动词-ing形式，不能接动词不定式，特别在英国英语中更是如此。

例如：

I dislike having to get up so early.

1．There are also differences as to how often we touch each other, how close we stand to someone we are talking to, and how we act when we meet and part.

注意此句中how引导的几个并列结构；另外，名词difference的复数形式表示具体的不同点，如果difference表示“不同”这个概念，则是不可数名词，无复数形式。

2．And if we are feeling down or lonely, there is nothing better than to see the smiling face of a good friend.

“There is nothing better than to do…”此处表示“没有比…更好的了”。

例如：

There is nothing better than to sit in a pub drinking.

没有比坐在酒吧里喝酒更好的事了。

3．Words a are important, but the way a person stands, folds his or her arms, or moves his or her hands can also give us information about his or her feelings.

此句中用了几个并列的谓语动词，要注意英语并列成分的规则：除了最后一个并列成分之前用一个并列连词以外，前面的并列成分都可以用逗号隔开。

再如：

While they were walking, they were talking, laughing and playing games. （并列的-ing形式）

Note: 要注意并列的成分的前后一致性，这是单项填空的常考题型。

(一) 动词的-ng形式作主语、宾语和表语：

1）动词的-ing形式作主语时，常表示概括性的或者一般性的行为。例如：

Fighting broke out between the South and the North. 南方与北方开战了。

Losing her new bicycle made her so upset.

她的新自行车丢了，搞得她心烦意乱。

2）动词的-ing形式作宾语时，既可以作动词的宾语，又可以作介词的宾语。某些动词或者动词短语后常接动词-ing形式作宾语。

例如：

Would you mind turning on your radio, please? I want to hear the hour’s news.

请你打开收音机好吗？我想听听本时的新闻。

The sparrow was so lucky that it just missed being caught.

那只麻雀真幸运，它刚好没有被射中。

3）动词的-ing形式可以作表语，表示“什么事是某事”。

例如：

Her job is washing，cleaning and taking care of the children.

她的工作是洗衣服、打扫卫生和看小孩。

Seeing is believing. 眼见为实。

（二）动词的-ing形式作状语：

动词的-ing形式作状语时，其逻辑主语一定是句子的主语，动词的-ing形式可以表示时间、条件、原因、方式或者伴随等情况，v-ing与句子的主语构成主动关系。

例如：

As I didn't receive any letter from him, I gave him a call.

Not receiving any letter from him, I gave him a call.

由于没有收到他的信，我给他打了电话。

If more attention was given to them, the trees could have grown better.

如果多多护理的话，这些树本来能够长得更好的。

Given more attention，the trees could have grown better.

假如多给些照顾，那些树会长得更好。

Many people come to the theme parks, looking for thrills and entertainment.

许多人来到主题公园寻求刺激和娱乐。

（三）动词的-ing形式作定语：

单个动词-ing形式作定语，常位于被修饰的词前；-ing形式短语作定语，常放在被修饰的词后。

例如：

We can see the rising sun. 我们可以看到从东方升起的太阳

He is a retired worker. 他是位退休的工人

There was a girl sitting there. 有个女孩坐在那里。

This is the question given. 这是所给的问题（个别分词如given, left等，尽管是单个的，但常放在被修饰的词后面）

There is nothing interesting. 没有有趣的东西（修饰不定代词的词，常放在被修饰的词后）

（四）动词的-ing形式作宾语补足语：

-ing形式作宾语补足语时，通常在感官动词和使役动词之后，表示一个主动的动作正在进行。值得注意的是：过去分词也可以作宾语补足语，但它们一般表示被动和完成。

例如：

The missing boys were last seen playing near the river.

那些孩子在失踪之前，人们曾经看见他们在河边玩耍。

He found his radio missing. 他发现他的收音机不见了。

I'll have my watch repaired. 我想把我的手表修一下。

[考点] 考查while表示“尽管…但是…”的意思。

[考例1] _________ model business is by no means easy to get into, the good model will always be in demand.

[解析] A本题的题意为“尽管模特行业根本不容易进入，但好模特总是紧缺”。此处只有while可以表达这个意思。

[拓展] while除引导时间状语从句以外，还可以引导表示转折、对比的句子。

例如：

I am a worker, while he is a student. 我是个工人，而他是个学生。（while引导句子表转折）

While I have many visitors every day, the one I have been expecting hasn’t appeared yet. 尽管我每天都有很多来访者，我一直盼望的人至今还没有出现。（while表示“尽管”的意思。）

[考点] 考查非谓语动词在具体语境中的理解。

[考例2] _________ such heavy pollution already, it may now be too late to clean up the river.

A．Having suffered B．Suffering C．To suffer D．Suffer

[解析] A非谓语动词在不同语境中，时态、含义都有不同。本句的含义为“河流已经遭受如此严重的污染，现在清理也许太迟了。”谓语动词的动作发生在having suffered之后，所以用的是动词-ing形式的完成式。

一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。

1．It was extremely dangerous, but he m___________ to avoid the accident.

2．The idea of working for state-owned enterprises has little a_________ to young people nowadays.

3．You should have come to the party last night. What p_________ you from joining us?

4．You didn't really see it - it was just your i__________.

5．Let's d_________ ourselves into several groups.

6．Don’t say nonsense! I want a _________(具体的) answer.

7．The nation wants peace; only a _________(少数) want the war to continue.

8． ________(教育) is given to children by the government.

9．Can you tell me for what the church will use the money it gets from__________(收集，募捐)?

10．He held the boy _________(牢固地) in his arms and cried.

二、单项填空：

1．China Daily is _______ a newspaper, it can also help us to improve our English.

A．less than B．more than C．not more than D．no more than

2．__________ is very important.

A． Solve the problem B．How to solve the problem

C．How to be solved the problem D．What to deal with the problem

3．He didn’t move _________ the music went on, but got up _______ it ended.

A．when, while B．while, when C．while, while D．when, when

4．The athletes stood, _________ their national flag ____________.

A．seeing, raising B．watching, raising

C．looked at, rising D．seeing, rising

5．Jack spent as much time as he __________ over his lessons.

A. could going B. went C. could go D. would going

6．I meant ___________ you, but I was too busy.

A．to have called at B．calling on C．to call on D．to have called on

7. I am often told that too much work and too little rest often _______ illness.

A. leads to B. leads on C. leads into D. leads off

8．Every summer is the summit period(高峰期) during which university students ________ jobs, and the talents-exchange(人才交流) market will accordingly prosper(繁荣).

A. find B. hunt C. look for D. hunt for

9．Some passengers told the reporters about their ___________ in the burning train.

A. details B. trips C. events D. experiences

10．China’s genetic engineering(基因工程) industry __________ in the late 1980s, two decades after some other countries.

A. set off B. set in C. set to D. set back

完形填空：

I would like to suggest that for sixty to ninety minutes each evening all television broadcasting in the United states be forbidden by law.

Let us take a 1 , reasonable look at what the results might be if such a(an) 2 were accepted: families might use the time for a real family hour. Without the distraction of TV, they might 3 together after dinner and actually talk to one another. It is well known that many of our 4 --everything in fact, from the generation gap to the high divorce rate to some forms of 5 illness-are caused at least in part by 6 to communicate. By using the quiet family hour to 7 our problems, we might get to know each other better, and to like each other better.

On evening when such talk is 8 , families could discover more active pastimes(消遣，娱乐). Freed from TV, forced to find their own activities, they might take a 9 together to watch the sunset 10 they might take a walk together. 11 free time and no TV, children and adults might discover reading. There is more entertainment in 12 than in a TV program. 13 report that the generation growing up with television can hardly write an English sentence, 14 at the college level. 15 is often learned from reading. A more literate new generation could be a product of the quiet hour.

A different 16 of reading might also be done as it was in the past: reading aloud. The quiet hour could become the story hour. When the 17 ends, the TV net works might be forced to 18 with better shows in order to get us back from our newly discovered activities.

At first glance, this idea seems radical(激进的). How will we spend the time then? The fact is: it has been only twenty-five years 19 television came to control American free time. Those of us thirty-five and older can 20 childhoods without television. It wasn’t that difficult.

1． A．valuable B．pleasant C．quick D．serious

2． A．advice B．suggestion C．opinion D．offer

3． A．get around B．stand still C．meet D．sit around

4． A．problems B． trouble C．affairs D．misfortune

5． A． physical B．common C．mental D．familiar

6． A．attempt B．failure C．ability D．permission

7． A．discuss B．talk C．make sure D．see to

8． A．impossible B． unnecessary C．funny D．unpleasant

12． A．a fine poem B．a good book C．a quiet hour D．a composition

13． A．Professors B． Scientists C． Parents D．Educators

15． A．Writing B．Skill C．Speaking D．Listening

16． A．form B． kind C．method D．step

17． A．reading B．quiet hour C．activity D．program

18． A． come across B. come about C．come up D．broadcast

19． A．before B．since C．until D．after

20． A．remind B． remember C．recognize D．know

一、1．managed 2．attraction 3．prevented 4．imagination 5．divide 6．specific

7．minority 8．Education 9．collections 10．firmly

1-5 DBDAC 6-10 BABCB 11-15 DBDCA 16-20 ABCBB

1．D 作者在第一段提出了自己的建议。下面解释自己的理由。首先作者建议用认真理性的态度考虑这个建议被接受后的结果。根据reasonable的含义也可判断出。

2．B 从空白前的不定冠词可以排除advice。从文章第一句作者就表明自己要提出建议，因此选suggestion。

3．D 吃过饭，全家人坐在餐桌旁交流。

4．A 由many可以推断出该空应该填入可数名词，首先排除trouble，该空后的破折号是对空白处词的解释。

5．C 家庭缺少交流、理解而引起的往往是精神疾病。

6．B 根据上下文可以判断出答案。

7．A “discuss our problem”。家人坐在一起讨论问题，增进了解。

8．B 晚上家人聚会还可以找到新的消遣形式。

9．C 由下面的they might take a walk together可以排除A项。为了看日出，开车到某个地方是很可能的。

10．B 此题用or表示选择。

11．D with free time and no TV表示原因。

12．B 此题与前句是顺承关系。

13．D educator“教育者”。

14．C 教育者的研究显示：看电视长大的这一代人几乎不会写一个英语句子，甚至上了大学的人也不行。Even表示强调。

15．A 学生看电视过多，因此不会写句子。

16．A 朗读是读书的一种形式。

17．B 阅读的那种安静时间可以变成讲故事的时间，这时，电视网络系统就必须提供更好的节目以把人们再吸引回来。

18．C come up with “提出、提供”，不能用被动语态； come across：“偶遇”； come about：“发生，产生”； broadcast“广播，播放”，不与with连用。

19．B 主句用的是现在完成时，可以判断出该用since。

20．B 35岁及其以上的人还应该能记得没有电视的童年。

高一英语课件(篇12)

Aims and demands:

1. Develop the Ss’ listening ability .

2. Grasp the usage of the language points:

at the doctor’s , take a look,, knock into fell over

It feels a bit tense .

That sounds very interesting.

Difficulty: Ask the Ss to make a dialogue between the doctor and a patient.

Teaching methods: listening, speaking, practicing

Learning method: How to listen smartly

Teaching aids: tape recorder, some slides

Procedure:

Step 1. New words:

T: How many gold medals did the Chinese players win?

There are a lot of international champions in China in the Olympic Games.

The two of whom are gymnasts . Who are they ?

Ss: They are 李小鹏 and 刘璇 .

T: Li is an international champion on the double bars.

Liu is an international champion on the beam.

And also the whole Chinese gymnastic team have won the gold prize.

T: Today we are going to learn “ Gymnastics” .

Do you know what pieces of equipment are used in gymnastics ?

rings , beam, high bar, high-and-low bars, double bars, beam, “horse”(side horse / pummelled horse（鞍马） , vaulting horse（跳马）)

T: Do men and women , boys and girls do the same kinds of exercises?

------- Men perform on the rings, on the double bars, on the high bar, and on a type of “horse” with our legs which has two handles fixed to the top surface.

While women perform on the high-and-low bars, one of which is higher than the other, and the beam, which is a length of wood only four inches wide which is fixed at a height of 1.20 meters above the ground.

Listen to the tape and choose the correct answers:

1. Sharon is a gymnast. She is ______.

A. at the teacher’s B. at the doctor’s C. at her friend’s D. at home

2. Something is wrong with Sharon’s ______.

A. left leg B. right shoulder C. left shoulder D. right leg

3. Sharon hurt herself when she was _____.

A. doing some exercises B. finishing some exercises

C. on the high-and-low bars D. jumping

4. The change between ___ temperatures makes the blood move and the damaged parts begin to repair themselves.

A. hot and cool B. warm and cool C. cold and cool D. hot and cold

5. At the end of the week, throw the frozen peas away. They _____ to eat.

A. will be fit B. won’t be fit C. would not like D. would like to

Step 4. Read by themselves and answer the questions;

2. What’s wrong with her? ---- Something is wrong with her left shoulder.

3. How did she hurt her shoulder? ---- While she was doing gym.

4. What kind of treatment did the doctor advise her to use? ----- to use the hot-cloth-and-frozen-peas treatment.

5. How often does she have to take this treatment? ---- twice a day for a week

6. Do you think that this interesting treatment is effective? ----- Yes.

7. Have you ever used the hot-cloth-and-frozen peas treatment? ---------

What treatment does the doctor tell her to do?

---- To use the hot-cloth-and-frozen-pea treatment.

Step 4. Reading and find out the language points

3. It feels a bit tense.

4. knock into sb.

Can you knock the nail into the wall?

The boy ran for the ball and knocked into a man.

He walked in the dark and knocked into a tree.

He slipped into a banana skin and fell over.

7. That sounds very interesting.

8. fit to eat:

Make up a dialogue between the two---- one is a doctor and the other is a patient

Patient: Says what the problem is

Doctor: Makes one or more comments and then gives some advice

P: Yes, I can’t sleep well.

P: Can you give me some medicine so that I can have a good sleep?

D: What can I do for you?

P: I’ve got a pain here. My left shoulder hurts.

D: Let me have a look at it.

P: Oh, I feel terrible.

D: Mmn, I see. It feels a bit tense, but it’s nothing serious.

P: Shall I take any medicine?

D: Yes. Take this medicine, two pills a time, three times a day. And try to use the hot-cloth-and-frozen peas treatment.

When a patient comes in what will the doctor say?

What can I do for you?

How can I help you?

What seems to be the matter?

Can I help you?

What will the patient say?

I’ve got a pain…

I’ve got a headache and a cough day and night.

I’ve got a temperature and all my bones ache.

I feel terrible.

I hurt my leg while I was….

I don’t feel well.

Then what will the doctor say?

Let me take a look at it / you.

Let me feel your pulse.

Left me take your temperature.

Oh, I see. It’s nothing serious.

Have a good rest and you’ll ..

You’ll be all right / well better soon.

Take this medicine / two pills a time, three times a day.

Aims and demands: Develop the Ss’ reading ability and have a good understanding of the text

Difficulty and importance: Have a deeper understanding of the text

Teaching methods: Reading and listening and discussion

Teaching aids: a tape recorder and some slide shown

Procedure:

What kinds of equipment are used in doing the gymnastic exercises?

As we know from the dialogue , Sharon hurt her left shoulder while doing some exercises on the high-and-low bars. So while you are doing gym, you should be more careful.

Now look at the pictures and tell :

Where are the gymnasts doing exercises / performing? ( P 51)

Ss: He is performing on the high bar.

He is performing on the double bars.

He is jumping / performing on a “horse”.

She is performing on a beam.

Listen to the tape of Lesson 34 and tell whether the following statements are true or false.

1. Olympic competitions started in Greece. T

2. Modern gymnastics began in the 18th century. F

3. If you want to become a top gymnast, it is important to start when you are 14 or 15 years old.F

4. Boys win Olympic gymnastics medals usually between the age of 19 and 25. T

5. Both boys and girls perform on the rings, on the double bars, on the high bar and so on. F

6. Only girls perform on the high-and-low bars. T

7. Only boys do floor exercises on the mat. F

8. Make sure you put on some watches, rings, and necklaces before you start. F

9. Ww simple safety measures to follow while ( you are ) training.

8. Follow : a) to take or accept 遵守,采纳,听从

follow the teacher’s instructions

You are speaking too fast and we can’t quite follow you.听懂

Follow the path and you will see the cinema.

She followed me into the classroom.

e) following can be used together with “the” , it means “next”

in the following year=== next year

highly: to a high degree 高度的,非常的

eg: Advertising is a highly developed twentieth-century industry. 高度发达的

He is a highly skilled worker. 非常熟练的

固定词组:

1. be content to do sth. 满足干…… 满意做……

They each have a computer on the desk.

Each of them has a computer on the desk.

4. glance at : look quickly at / give a quick at

5. be busy doing sth.

They are busy training in the gymnastic.

We had been bus preparing for the mid-term examination.

The first thing …. . was to go up her trainer and thanked her.

句中两个作表语的不定式 go up to 和 thank her for 都省略了 to ,这是因为主语有定语从句 she did 来修饰的缘故.

一般地说,解释 do 的精确意思的分句,可以用不带 to 的动词不定式.

我们现在想做的就是躺下来休息.

What we want to do now is ( to ) lie down and rest.

我所做的就是推了他一下.

What I did was ( to ) give him a little push.

字典的作用是帮助学生查生字的词义和用法.

What a dictionary does is ( to) help the students to find out the meaning and the usage of new words.

Agreement.

Correct the mistakes if any. ( Lesson 34~35)

1. It was in Greece where the Olympic competition started. ( that )

2. It was in 1811 when an outdoor gymnastics center for men was opened in Berlin. (that)

3. There are also records of gymnastics performing in China. ( being performed/performed)

4. My bike is repairing . ( being repaired)

5. He didn’t mind leaving at home alone . ( being left )

6. Being lost can be a terrifying experience. (true )

7. Dance is an important part of training as it prepares they for the types of movements required in gymnastics. ( them )

8. The students are preparing the exam. ( add for )

9. In competitions women perform some of their exercises with music. ( to )

10. Men usually gained Olympic gymnastics medals between 19 to 25. ( won, between…and)

11. The gymnasts should hold a position steady, keep their balances while doing a handstand. (balance)

(steady adj, adv. Steadily adv. )

12. Training by yourself in a gym can be high dangerous. (highly )

广告业是二十世纪高度发达的行业.

Advertising is a highly developed twentieth century industry.

他是个非常熟练的工人.

He is a highly skilled worker.

Replace the following underlined phrases with the phrases in L35.

13. She is satisfied with her present job.

be content with sth.

be content to do sth.

14. In a word , she gave a good performance and landed neatly and steadily. (In all / all in all)

15. She gave a quick look at the judge. ( glanced at )

16. What we want to do now is lie down and rest. ( true )

字典的作用是帮助学生查生字的词义和用法.

What a dictionary does is ( to) help the students to find out the meaning and the usage of new words.

Correct the mistakes if any. ( Lesson 34~35)

1. It was in Greece where the Olympic competition started.

2. It was in 1811 when an outdoor gymnastics center for men was opened in Berlin.

3. There are also records of gymnastics performing in China.

4. My bike is repairing .

5. He didn’t mind leaving at home alone .

6. Being lost can be a terrifying experience.

7. Dance is an important part of training as it prepares they for the types of movements required in gymnastics.

8. The students are preparing the exam.

9. In competitions women perform some of their exercises with music.

10. Men usually gained Olympic gymnastics medals between 19 to 25.

11. The gymnasts should hold a position steady, keep their balances while doing a handstand.

12. Training by yourself in a gym can be high dangerous.

Replace the following underlined phrases with the phrases in L35.

13. She is satisfied with her present job.

14. In a word , she gave a good performance and landed neatly and steadily.

15. She gave a quick look at the judge.

16. What we want to do now is lie down and rest. ( true or false ?)

Exercises for Unit 9 ---3A DCABB CBB

1. ___ him and then try to copy what he does. (99)

A. Mind B. Glance at C. Stare at D. Watch

2. The little boy runs for the football and ___ a man standing there.

3. I cheered do loudly at the match that I completely ___ my voice.

A. lost B. missed C. forgot D. left

4. --- Do you think the Stars will beat the Bulls?

--- I don’t know. But this is the last time. The fans ___ them to win whole – heartedly.

A. hope B. require C. prefer D. demand

5. It was how the young man had learned five foreign languages ___ attracted the audience’s interest.

A. so that B. that C. what D. in which

6. It was for this reason __ her uncle moved out of New York and settled down in a small village. ( S)

7. It is the ability to so the job ___ matters not where you come from or what you are. (2000)

8. It was not ___ she took off here dark glasses ___ I realized she was a famous film star. (92)

Correct the mistakes: (for Unit 9 --- 3A )

It was Sunday and Zhou Lan was going 1.____

to take part in the first gymnastic compe-

tition. As soon as her competition started, 2.____

she tried her best and did good in per- 3.____

forming on three pieces of equipments 4.____

as well as on the floor. Now the time came

to her performance on the high -and-low 5.____

bars. She stands below them and waited. 6.____

When the judge nodding, she began . 7.____

She jumped upwards, caught the high bar

in two hands and did a neat circle . 8.____

Altogether,she performed wonderful and 9.____

landed nearly and steadily on the floor. Then

came the results. Victory for Zhou Lan!

1. true 2. her--- the 3. well 4. equipment 5. to – for 6. stood 7. nodded 8. in – with

高一英语课件(篇13)

Period 3

Integrating skills ---- reading and writing (snack)

Step 1. Warming up (pre-reading)---watch a video and answer:

Show a tape and get the ss to discuss

1. Which diet is healthier, Chinese or western? Why?

Chinese, it’s high in ….. while the western diet contains …

2. why do some of the British have no teeth left at the age of thirty?

They eat too much sugar and fat in the form of chips and coke.

Although chinese diet is healthier ,we still feel hungry between meals. So what will we have to do?

Eat some snacks.

Ok. Now listen what snacks are mentioned in the listening materials?

Step 2 listen and speak out

To learn the structure of how to write a recipe. including two activities.

Activity One: read and learn what the 1st para talks about.

Para 1 1.Tick out what food is mentioned?

2. Read and answer

1) Which is healthier? Fruit

2) Why is fruit healthy?

It hasn’t too much fat and sugar. It gives us carbohydrates, which our body and brain use for energy? It also gives us fiber and Vitamin.

3) Why are the other two unhealthy food?

They have too much tat and sugar.

Activity Two

Para 2 Learn the outline of a recipe

Q1 : Besides these two snacks, the passage also mentions some other snacks. What are they?

Answer:---- Shaomai and Chicken roll-ups.

Q2 : How can we make Shaomai and Chicken roll-ups?.

Get Ss to give the outline of one of the two recipes (pair work)

Write an outline of a recipe:

Name:

Ingredients:

Directions:

Then deal with the recipe one by one.

Step 3: writing (group work) begin to write a recipe according to what you have learnt in the passage.

Discuss and write a recipe

Name Ingredients Directions

Key words:

Green onions, garlic, pepper, soy sauce, ginger, vinegar, sugar, wine, salt.

Peel, slice, dice, steam, fry, boil, stir, mix, add, chop, spoon., fill, cut… into pieces, fold, roll up

Discuss: 1) name your dish

2) talk about the ingredients of the dish and directions

3) list your steps of how to cook the dish.

Step 4 Evaluation

Share what the Ss have written in groups and in Class.

Teacher give some comments on the group works.

Sample 1 :

Golden delicious fish!

Ingredients:

a fish, green onions, garlic, ginger, red peppers, pepper sauce, salt, vinegar, soy sauce

Directions:

1. Cut the body of the fish.

2. Add salt to the fish before it is cooked.

3. Chop the bulb of green onions into small sections, and cut the green onions into pieces. Peel the garlic.

4. Mix the onions, garlic, ginger and red peppers. Fry them for a short time. Then get them all out.

5. Cook the fish and add vinegar and soy sauce.

6. Add onions, garlic, ginger and red peppers. Also add pepper sauce and water to boil the fish for some time.

7. Spoon the fish and add some fresh chopped green onions.

Sample 2:

Golden delicious fish!

Ingredients:

a fish, green onions, garlic, ginger, red peppers, pepper sauce, salt, vinegar, soy sauce

Directions:

First cut the body of the fish.and add some salt to the fish before it is cooked. Second chop the bulb of green onions into small sections, and cut the green onions into pieces. Peel the garlic. Mix the onions, garlic, ginger and red peppers. Next fry them for a short time. Get them all out. Cook the fish and add vinegar and soy sauce. Then Add some onions, garlic, ginger and red peppers. You can also add pepper sauce and water to boil the fish for some time. Finally spoon the fish and add some fresh chopped green onions. Now the golden fish is ready and you can enjoy it.

教后感:

高一英语课件(篇14)

Teaching goals

1. Talk about humour and comedians

2. Practice saying tongue twisters

3. Express intensions and plans

4. Learn to use the –ing Form (1) as Atrribute and Object Complement

5. Write a funny story or joke in English

Period 1 Word study

1. Homour/humor

(1) amusement 幽默;诙谐;幽默感

He has no sense of humour. 他没有幽默感。

(2) person’s state of mind; temper 心情,心境

My daughter is in a good humour today. 我女儿今天很高兴。

(3) v. 使满足；迁就

When a person is ill he may have to be humored.

一个人生病时，被人都的迁就他。

out of humour 不高兴；心情不好

humourous adj. 幽默感的，诙谐的

2. bitter adj. 苦的；难过的；痛苦的

The soup is bitter.

His failure to pass the examination was a bitter disappointment.

他考试失败是一件极令人失望的事。

a bitter pill to swallow 苦药丸;勉强接受的苦事

to the bitter end 到底；拼命

take the bitter with the sweet 甘与苦都接受

bitterly adv. 苦涩地 bitterness n. 苦味

3. comedy 喜剧 tragedy 悲剧

comedian 喜剧演员；行动滑稽的人

comedienne 喜剧中的女演员；女丑角

He prefers comedy to tragedy.

Comedians often work alone or as a pair.

Song Dandan is a popular comedienne.

4. intend v. ---have in mind as a purpose or plan 打算；意欲

intend to do sth 打算做…

intend that… 打算；

intend sb to do sth 想让某人做某事

be intended for 是为…设计的

intend to have done sth. 本想做某事（而没做）

intention n. 意图；目的；意旨

1.你今天打算做什么？

.2.他们计划今年完成这一工程。

3.我们打算让他去说服李先生。

4.这本书是给孩子们写的.

5.我本想去拜访你，但是来了一位不速之客。

5. amuse v. = satisfy or excite the sense of humour or cause laughter of 使欢乐；使发笑

amusement n. 快乐；娱乐；消遣

amusing adj. 引起乐趣的；娱人的

amusingly adv. 娱人地

feel/be amused at/by/with 对…感到有趣

1.我们玩游戏自乐。

2. 他的回答使我好笑。

6. appreciate v.

（1）be thankful or grateful for 感激

（2）understand and enjoy the good qualities of

赏识；鉴赏；欣赏

1.我感激对我的帮助。

2.凡高死后他的画才得到赏识。

3.我欣赏演出的每一个节目。

4.如蒙邀请，不胜感激。

7. suffer v. =experience pain or difficulty 受…苦／折磨

suffering n. 痛苦苦难

sufferer n. 受难者；病人

sufferable adj. 受得住的；禁得住的

When I was in my childhood, I suffered from poverty.

Economy in Iraq is suffering from the war.

I know you have suffered a lot. = I know you have had a lot of sufferings.

8. Operate v.---(cause to) work 开动; 使运转; 使生效; 操作;管理；作手术

The machine operates continuously.

This law operates universally. 这个规律是普遍起作用的。

He intends Dr Li to operate on him.

The machines are operated by electricity.

This company operates two factories.

Operation n. 工作；操作；生效；手术

Operator n. 操作人员；电话接线员；

Operative adj. 操作的；运转的；有效的

9. Direction n. 方向；方位；（pl.）指示；说明；倾向；

He drove in the direction of London.

He gave me directions to enable me to find his house.

Our school is under the direction of a good principle.

The enemy ran away in all directions.

directive adj. 指导的

director n. 指导者；董事

direct adj. 直接的

directly adv. 直接地

10. confuse v. ---mix up; put into disorder 弄糊涂；使混乱；混淆；

The road sign confused the driver.

Don't confuse Austria with [and] Australia.

They asked me so many questions that I got confused.

Confused adj. 混乱的；慌乱的；狼狈的

Confusedly adv. 慌乱地；混乱地

Confusion n. 混乱；慌乱；混淆

Period 2

Step 1 Warming up

1. Show a Chinese tongue twister to Ss and let them speak out as quickly as possible.(slide show)

“四是四，十是十；十四是十四，四十是四十；谁要把十四说成四十，我就打他十四；谁要把四十说成十四，我就打他四十。”

2. T: “In fact, not only are there many Chinese tongue twisters, but also there are many English tongue twisters. ” let Ss read the following tongue twister as quickly as possible.

1. She sells sea shells on the seashore. The seashells she sells are seashells she is sure.

2. There those thousand thinkers were thinking how did the other three thieves go through.

3. Picky people pick Peter Pan Peanut Butter. Peter Pan Peanut is the peanut picky people pick.

4. I wish to wish the wish you wish to wish, but if you wish the wish the witch wishes, I won't wish the wish you wish to wish.

5. I thought a thought. But the thought I thought wasn't the thought I thought I thought. If the thought I thought I thought had been the thought I thought, I wouldn't have thought so much.

3. T say: “ It is difficult for people to say the sentence without making errors, these types of sentences are called tongues twisters. Tongue twisters are also difficult for native speakers. It can be fun to practise a few and try to see who can say them fastest.”

Step 2 Listening

1. Let Ss listen to the tape the first time, without taking notes. Make sure they understand all the words before listening. Then, ask them to finish Exercise 1.

2. let Ss listen to the tape again and ask them to finish Exercise 2. Then play the tape again to help them finish the Exercise 2

Step 3 Speaking

1. T asks: “Do you like to watch comedies or crosstalk shows?”

“ Which comedies, little sketches, or crosstalk shows do you like best? ”

“ Who is your favourite comedian? Why do you like him/ her?”

2. Listen and read the dialogue, then explain some language points in the dialogue.

make sb. laugh act the role of

tongue twister a couple of intend to

3. let Ss work in pairs, one act as a journalist and the other act as a circus clown and let them make a similar dialogue about interview between journalist and circus, then let Ss act it out in the class.

4. Learn useful expressions to express intensions and plans:

5. Group work (A)

6. Group work (B)

Step 4 Homework

1. Write a story according to the pictures and what you have heard on the tape.

2. TALKING: (Workbook, page 108)

Ask Ss to look at the pictures, make up a funny story about what is happening and say whether they think the situations are funny or not.

Period 2

Step 1 Revision

1. Word list

2. Enjoy the students’ dialogues

3.Read the following sentences as quickly as possible.

1). A skunk sat on a stump and thunk the stump stunk, but the stump thunk the skunk stunk.

2). Six thick thistle sticks. Six thick thistles stick.

3). She sells sea shells by the sea shore.

The shells she sells are surely seashells.

So if she sells shells on the seashore,

I'm sure she sells seashore shells.

Step 2 Pre-reading

1. Show some pictures to Ss :

Tasks: “Do you know these people?”

Stan Laurel and Oliver Hardy

The comic duo of the 1930s “Laurel and Hardy.” the thin one is called Stan Laurel, while the stout one is called Oliver Hardy. They are funny because they are each other’s opposites: one fat and one thin; one is clever and one is silly etc.

Mr Bean

Although Mr Rowan Atkinson acts as different comic characters he is most famous around the world as Mr Bean. Mr Bean is funny because he makes funny faces, he acts silly, he seems to be quite stupid, and the things he does are strange.

Dustin Hoffman

Dustin Hoffman in the film Tootsie (1982). In this film Hoffman acts the role of a woman, and many people agree that his performance was so good that you often can’t tell the difference. But in the film of course there all kinds of funny moments.

Ma Ji

Ma Ji is a well-known artist of crosstalk shows in China. His numerous crosstalk shows always make his audience roar with laughter.

2. Read the text and find out the best choice.

1).Why is Dustin Hoffman so famous?

A. He is famous for his works.

B. He is famous for his foreign accent.

C. He is famous for his role acting as a woman.

D. He is good at playing on words.

2). What does a “sketch” mean in the text?

A. a rough, quickly made drawing

B. general outline

C. short, humourous play

D. a piece of writing

3). Comedians and players in a comedy are similar in ______.

A. Their way of playing with words

B. Clothes

C. Crossing-dressing way

D. Foreign accent

4). Choose the main idea of each paragraph.

a.Description of a clown b.What’s a crosstalk show

c.The traditional crosstalk show d.Description of comedians

e.The writers of comedies both at home and abroad

A. 1-e; 2-a; 3-d; 4-b; 5-c

B. 1-e; 2-d; 3-c; 4-a; 5-b

C. 1-a; 2-e; 3-d; 4-b; 5-c

D. 1-e; 2-a; 3-b; 4-d; 5-c

5). Why have crosstalk shows been popular with people? Which of the following is not the reason?

A. They have two speakers.

B. They make people not only laugh, but also think about life.

C. The richness of the spoken language is made full use of.

D. Their talk includes rhythm and rhyming words.

Step 3 post-reading

1. Pair work let Ss describe a clown in their own words.

2. Discussion compare Western and Chinese comedy shows. What do they have in common? How are they different?

3. Exercise finish the exercise 2 in Studentbook, page 53

Step 3. listening True (T) or False (F)

1.Camedies are music plays that make people laugh.

2.Word play is a way to create fun in comedies.

3.Clowns use some words to make people laugh.

4.Both body language and face are important in comedians’ shows.

5.A crosstalk show has two speakers making many jokes and funny conversations.

Step 4 Oral practice

1. Can you describe a clown in your own words?

2. What does a clown look like?

Step 5 language points

make …funny 使得…有趣

be famous for 因…而著名

make fun of 取笑; 开…的玩笑

roar with laughter 大笑

make-up n. 化妆

act out 表演

have in common with 和…有共同之处

date back to ＝date from 追溯到

a flow of 源源不断的

make use of 利用

Step 6 translation

1. 西安以兵马俑而著名.

Xi’an is famous for the Terra Cotta Warriors.

2.有时候相声演员以取笑自己来逗观众大笑.

Sometimes crosstalk players make fun of themselves to make the audience roar with laughter.

3. 西安古城墙始建于明朝.

Xi’an City Wall dates back to the Ming dynasty.

4.如今越来越多的人开始利用源源不断的网络资源.

Nowadays, more and more people begin to make use of the constant flow of information on the internet.

Step 7 exercises

1. He hates to be _____.

A. make fun of B. making fun of

C made fun of D. made fun

2. The castle ____ the 16th century.

A. is dated to B. dates from

C. dated from D. is dating back to

3. It is ____ to have cold drinks on such a hot day.

A. a fun B. funny C. fun D. funs

4. Our losses should be ____ with more loans, otherwise we won’t be satisfied.

A. made in B. made out C. made for D. made up

5. He put his whole heart into ____ ways ____ the quality of the products.

A. think of; of improve B. think up; to improve

C. thinking of; improving D. thinking up; of improving

Period 5

Integrating skill

Step 1 Reading comprehension

1.Which of the following is not mentioned in the text?

A. The writer was on her way to an interview.

B. She braked hard and hit another cyclist.

C. She shouted the driver of a yellow car.

D. The driver of the yellow car was angry with her for being so rude.

2. The driver of the yellow car turned out to be ______.

A.The boss of the office

B.The manager of the company

C.One of her friends

D.The man with whom she had to work together

3. What does she mean by the sentence “the last time we met I did most of the talking”?

A.You listened to me last time we met.

B. I’ll listen to you this time.

C. I shall say nothing about the accident.

D. I think you must be angry with me.

4. Which of the following can be used as another title for the text?

A. An Accident

B. An Interview

C. Tell Him What You Think of Him!

D. A Kind Manager

5. From the text, we can conclude that the manager was ______.

A.A careless driver B. selfish

C. Tolerant (宽容的) D. determined

Step 2 language points:

1.be on good terms with 与某人关系好

2.cut in 插入

3.in the other direction 朝着另外方向

in the direction of 朝着…方向

4. brake hard 使劲刹车

5.go up 上前去

6.lay down 放下

7.drive off 开车走掉

8.knock off 撞掉

9.shout at 冲着…大嚷

10. be on time for 按时

11. in great surprise 吃惊的

12. in (total) silence 一言不发地

13. look on…as… ＝ regard…as… 把…看作是

14. be angry with sb 对…生气

15. make jokes about 拿…开玩笑

Step 3. exercises:

1. 他们把受伤的人放在地上。

2. 我看见他开车向着城里的方向去了。

3. 他对着我大叫大嚷，我很生气。

4. 我和李岩关系一直很好，我把他当作我的最亲密的朋友。

5. 那个司机把一个男孩撞下自行车，却驾车跑了。

They laid the injured man down on the ground.

I saw him drive away in the direction of the town.

I was angry with him for his shouting at me.

I have been on good terms with Li Yan and I look on him as my closest friend.

The driver knocked a boy off his bike but drove off.

Step 4 Homework

Write a funny story or joke in English.

Period 6

Grammar

Period 7

Exercises in workbook

Period 8

Workbook integrating skills

1. Read the poem and explain the meaning of it.

2. Understand the poem better by going through the explanations on the reading paper.

高一英语课件(篇15)

The First Period

Ⅰ. 汉英翻译：

1. 对．．．有影响 have an effect on

2. 违背自然 go against nature

3. 作．．．笔记 take notes of

4. 尽可能充分利用时间 make as much use of time as possible

5. 引进 bring in

6. 记得某事 have ... in mind

7. 扮演角色 act the role of

8. 哄堂大笑 roar with laughter

9. 使用双关语 play on words

10. （与某某）有共同之处 have in common with

11. 说实话 tell the truth

12. 从一种文化到另一种文化 from culture to culture

13. 直视某人的眼睛 look into one's eyes

14. 成圆形状 in a circle

15. 昂起头来 hold up one's head

16. 沿路直走 go straight down this road

17. 共同的 in common

18. 以．．．为基础 be based on

19. 精力集中于 focus on

20. 在海底行走 walk on the ocean floor

Ⅱ. 单词拼写:

1. Advanced techniques / technology (技术) have been used to increase the produce.

2. The shortage / lack (缺乏) of water reminds people to save water.

3. He has been into gardening (园艺) since childhood.

4. I'm fond of the golden (金色) sun rays at sunset.

5. He is short of practical (实际) experience.

6. The Chinese Revolution has been divided into several stages (时期) .

7. The actual (实际) cost was much higher than we had expected.

8. We take this opportunity of expreessing our sincere appreciation (感激) of your help.

9. The whole ceremony took place silently (寂静无声) .

10. They went to an amusement (娱乐) park last Sunday.

11. This is a confusing (难以理解的) word because it had two meanings.

12. A drunk man drove a truck crazily (疯狂的) in the street and resulted in a serious accident.

13. He bent (弯腰) forward to hear what the child said.

14. I'm very sorry that this has occurred (发生) to you.

15. The attraction (引力) of the moon for the earth causes the tides.

16. The old temple was delivered in sections (部分) and assembled on the site.

17. With just a little imagination (想象) you could turn this place into a palace.

18. A minority (少数) of the children wanted to dance, but the majority chose a picnic.

19. There was a quarrel about dividing (分开) the stolen goods.

20. He explained all the details (细节) to us.

Ⅲ. 句型转换：

1. Although China is a big country, only 7% of the land can be used for farming.

Big as China is, only 7% of the land can be used for farming.

2. Speak English where it is possible.

Speak English where possible.

3. Future agriculture should depend not only on traditional methods but also on high technology.

Future agriculture should depend on high technology as well as traditional methods.

4. More latest technical information was introduced from abroad.

More latest technical information was brought in from abroad.

5. Jia Sixie, who lived in the sixth century, wrote a book called Qi Min Yao Shu.

Jia Sixie, living in the sixth century, wrote a book which was called Qi Min Yao Shu.

6. Their clothes, make-up and the way they walk make people laugh.

It is their clothes, make-up and the way they walk that make people laugh.

7. Dating from the Qin Dynasty, the traditional crosstalk shows have made people all over China roar with laughter.

Dating back to the Qin Dynasty, the traditional crosstalk shows have made people all over China roar with laughter.

8. Their talk includes not only tongue twisters but also rhythm and rhythming words.

Their talk includes rhythm and rhyming words as well as tongue twisters.

9. I came with the intention of staying, but now I have decided to leave.

I intended to come here to stay, but now I have decided to leave.

10. I decided to consider the whole matter to be a great joke.

I decided to look on the whoke matter as a great joke.

11. Just like spoken language, body language is not the same in different cultures.

Just like spoken language, body language varies from culture to culture.

12. In some countries, for example, France and Russia, a visiting friend is greeted with a kiss on the cheek.

In some countries, such as France and Russia, a visiting friend is welcomed with a kiss on the cheek.

13. A smile can be helpful for us to pass the difficult situations and find friends in a world of strangers.

A smile can help us get though difficult situations and find friends in a world of strangers.

14. If we are feeling sad, it's the best to see the smiling face of a good friend.

If we are feeling down or lonely , there is nothing better than to see the smiling face of a good friend.

15. After visitors enjoyed the rides at the headland, they could take the shuttle to the lowland.

Having enjoyed the rides at the headland, visitors could take the shuttle to the lowland.

16. Visitors can go on exciting rides at the place where they can feel what is like to do things.

Visitors can go on exciting rides where they can feel what is like to do things.

17. You sit in a car that ”falls“ from a tall tower, and you scream your way down to a safe landing.

Screaming your way down to a safe landing, you sit in a car that ”falls“ from a tall tower.

18. The movie is made according to a real-life incident.

The movie is based on a real-life incident.

19. Your ideas should include all kinds of attractions and activities.

Your ideas should include a variety of attractions and activities.

20. Even the guestures we use for ”yes“ and ”no “ are different around the world.

Even the guestures we use for ”yes“ and ”no“ are not the same all over the world.

The Second Period

单项选择：

1. She's look ______ the leading actress in the film.

A. out into B. for as C. on as D. out of [ C ]

2. Tigers, which were considered to be ______ to man, now are on the list of endangered animals.

A. a danger B. danger C. dangers D. endangered [ A ]

3. He ______ the children for hours with his stories and jokes..

A. made B. amuse C. delight D. entertained [ D ]

4. My interest in stamp collecting ______ my school days.

A. dated back to B. dates to C. dates on D. dates from [ D ]

5. The fire ______ at might was still seen ______ the next morning.

A. breaking out; burning

B. to breal out; to burn

C. broke out; burnt

D. had broken out; burning [ A ]

6. I didn't ______ the importance of English ______ I decided to have that job interview.

A. know; unless B. realize; until

C. see; when D. notice; while [ B ]

7. The picture ______ on the wall is painted by my nephew.

A. having hung B. hanging C. hangs D. hanged [ B ]

8. Shanghai is ______ the base of China's industry.

A. well-known B. well-known as C. famous D. famous for [ B ]

9. I remember the many times she tried to spell words into my small hand. At last she ______ my understanding.

A. made B. got C. took D. reached [ D ]

10. We ______ each other all the best in the new year.

A. hoped B. wanted C. wished D. expected [ C ]

11. At present some children ________ their parents for whatever they need.

A. ask about B. bring into C. depend on D. reach for [ C ]

12. It was in the room ______ Lu xun was born ______ we had the conference.

A. where, where B. that, that

C. that, where D. where, that [ D ]

13. As much use of time as possible has been made ______ his study.

A. to further B. of furthering

C. of to further D. to furthering [ A ]

14. The old man is still in danger. He is ______ he was yesterday.

A. as well as B. not worse than

C. no better than D. more worse than [ C ]

15. This hall will ______ 3000 people.

A. include B. sit C. hold D. take [ C ]

16. The temperature in greenhouses will be controlled with computers, ______ the weather is like outside.

A. however B. whatever C. no matter how D. what [ B ]

17. Since vegetables are ______ from the wind, rain and insects, they can grow without danger _____ diseases.

A. kept, by B. prevented, of

C. protecting, in D. in proptected, from [ D ]

18. The police ______ the room for finger prints.

A. checked B. tested C. left D. tried [ C ]

19. Can you ______ what life would be like without electricity for a week?

A. think B. imagine C. suppose D. dream [ B ]

20. I didn't follow the ________ printed on the box, and broke the machine.

A. message B. information C. notes D. instructions [ D ]

21. ________ two years to looking after her sick father, she badly needed a holiday.

A. Having devoted B.Devoted

C. To be devoted D. Having been devoted [A]

22. By the end of last year , another new gymnasium ________ in Beijing.

A. would be completed B. was being completed

C. has been completed D. had been completed [ D ]

23. Unless ______ to speak, you should remain silent at the conference.

A. invited B. inviting C. was invited D. has invited [A]

24. There's a ______ to one's capacity, so one should not make oneself overtired.

A. relaxation B. contribution C. hesitation D. limitation [D]

25. Your desk is crowded with too many unnecessary things, you have to ______ some of them.

A. remain B. resist C. remove D. renew [C]

26. Social ______ vary greatly from country to country. Remember, ”When in Rome, do as the Romans do."

A. customs B. manners C. habits D. practices [A]

27. You should seize the ______ . It may never come again. [C]

A. lunch B. tip C. opportunity D. information

28. Women were not allowed ______ in the okd Olympics, ____ began around the year 776BC. [ D ]

A. join; it B. to join; that

C. joining; which D. to join; which

29. You should ______ your attention on what your teacher is saying.

A. pay B. draw C. take D. focus [D]

30. Complete the following sentences. What you write must be _____ what you hear. [ B ]

A. basing B. based on C. is based on D. base on

31. It suddenly _____ him that he was not allowed to go there.

A. occurred B. happened C. hit D. got [ C ]

32. ______ , I don't agree with him. [ B ]

A. Telling the truth

B. To tell the truth

C. Tell you the truth

D. To tell truth

33. He is now ____ different John Smith from ______ he was three years ago. [ A ]

A. a; what B. the; the C. a; that D. the; what

34. ---What has made him so unhappy?

--- ________ the ticket for the football match. [ D ]

A. Having been lost B. Being lost

C. Because of losing D.Losing

35. ---I must apologize for ______ ahead of time.

---That's all right. [ B ]

A. letting you not know B. not letting you know

C. letting you know not D. letting not you know

36. He didn't mind ______ TV while he was working on his novel.

A. they watching B. they watch

C. them to watch D. their watching [ D ]

37. The line is busy. I can't ______ although I've tried several times.

A. go through B. get through C. hear from D. ring up [B]

38. That old building was ______ in order that they could build a new apartment house. [ C ]

A. tearing down B. broke down

C. torn down D. breaking down

39. You are lucky to have avoided _______ .

A. to be punished B. punishing

C. punish D. being -punished [D ]

40. Miss Chen's bad habit is ______ without thorough understanding.

A. reads B. reading C. being read D. read [B]

The Third Period

Fill in the blanks according to the contents of units 19-22.

1. How are people's eating habits changing over the years?

2. It was from the early 1990s that the scientists started to develop new techniques to increase agricultural production without harming the environment.

3. Chemical fertilisation, for example, helps to produce better crops, but is harmful to the enviroment.

4. Future agriculture should depend on high technology as well as traditional methods.

5. The biggest problem of Chinese farmers is the shortage of arable land.

6. Today, many vegetables are not grown in gardens but in greenhouses where they are protected from the wind, rain and insects.

7. In the past there were no trees left in or around the village.

8. To the villager's great joy, the tree and tea crops are also bringing in money to them.

9. Jia Sixie's book is a practical guide to farming.

10. After about three years, her work planting trees had turned barren land green again.

11. I would like to reach a wide audience, though I mostly have adults in mind .

12. My next show will have a part in which I act the role of a scientist, the way that a scientist walks and talks.

13. The actors make us laugh by making fun of somebody's way of dressing or telling an amusing story.

14. What comedians have in common with the player in a comedy is their way of playing with words.

15. Dating back to the Qin Dynasty, the traditional crosstalk shows , or xiangshaeng shows, have made people all over China roar with laughter for centuries.

16. If you are not fluent in Chinese, you will not catch all of it.

17. I could hear the newly-married couple quarrelling every day over small matters.

18. Learning to speak a foreign language enriches one's life.

19. A yellow car passed me and suddenly cut in right in front of me, as there was another car coming in the other direction.

20. We looked at each other for a moment in great surprise and total silence.

21. You are late for a flight and you want to go ahead of the queue.

22. Making eye contact- looking directly into someone's eyes - is in some countries a way to show interest.

23. A smile can help us get through difficult situations and find friends in a world of strangers.

24. A smile can open doors and tear down walls.

25. We can smile at ourselves in the mirror to make ourselves feel happier and stronger.

26. Moving the index finger forwards and backwards.

27. I feel like taking a rest. Would you mind my sitting down for a while.

28. When I got home, I found it in a total mass. It took me hours to put my house inorder.

29. The tail will stand straight out from the body..

30. To show friendship, elephants will touch each other with their trunks and stand close to each other, putting their foreheads together.

31. Straight down, then left, across the bridge, walk past the free fall ride and it will be on my left.

32. A theme park is a collection of rides, exhibitions and other attractions that are based on a common theme.

33. What they all have in common is that they combine fun with the opportunity to learn something.

34. The park is divided into two sections.

35. Having enjoyed the rides at the Headland, visitors can take the shattle to the lowlanfd.

36. He cut off the electricity quickly and prevented an accident.

37. The journey begins at the beach and continues down to the bottom of the sea.

38. If you stand at the top of the tower, you get a wonderful view of the coast and the sea.

39. Disney land in Califorria was one of the first theme parks to become popular around the world.

40. What do people do at theme parks, besides looking at exhibitions?

本文来源: http://www.dg15.com/a/5922672.html

上一篇：欠条书(通用13篇)

下一篇：游园活动总结3篇

"大学课件"延伸阅读

2023桂花雨课件(精品十五篇) 本文将为大家介绍一些关于“桂花雨课件”的相关资料，请务必仔细阅读以下内容。在上课之前，老师需要准备教案和课件，只要在上课前将教案和课件准备好即可。新教师需要投入更多的时间和精力来完善教案和课件。...

2023.10.19 桂花雨课件

礼仪课课件精品五篇每位老师不可或缺的课件是教案课件，因此教案课件可能就需要每天都去写。教案和课件是实现教学目标的基础。这份“礼仪课课件”是我精益求精的结果期待得到您的赞赏，希望这些信息能够为你的决策提供一些有用的帮助和支持！...

2023.09.26 礼仪课件

2024高一英语课件(精品十五篇) 资料可以指人事物的相关多类信息、情报。当我们的学习任务遇到困难时，往往都需要参考资料。资料可以帮助我们更高效地完成各项工作。那么，你知道优秀的资料是怎样的呢？以下是由小编为你整理的《高一英语课件》，仅供参考，我们来看看吧！I. 汉英翻译1、发生……，结果…… 6、占有，占领2、在世界的另一端 7、查...

2024.03.09 高一英语课件

学校宣传课件(精品五篇) 希望这篇“学校宣传课件”能够符合您的期望。老师会将课本中的主要教学内容整理到教案课件中，因此写教案需要认真对待。学生的客观反馈可以帮助教师更准确地调整教学策略。非常感谢您的阅读并留下宝贵的意见！...

2024.01.04 学校宣传课件宣传课件

学校教育课件精品十篇在开课之前，每位教师都会携带自己精心准备的教案和课件，因此，教师必须细致地规划每个教案和课件中的关键和困难部分。定制漂亮的教学课件有助于提升教师的教学效果。下面是编辑为您整理的“学校教育课件”相关的最新信息，感谢您的关注和阅读，同时也请您分享给身边的朋友，让更多的人受益！...

2023.10.04 学校教育课件

树木学课件精品十一篇接下来为您分享的是本站我们为您挑选的“树木学课件”，将此页加入收藏夹以备随时访问。教案课件是老师工作中的一部分，老师还没有写的话现在也来的及。教案是教师发挥教育智慧的重要方式之一。...

2024.04.06 树木课件

大学库课件(精品十五篇)

大学库课件

大学库课件【篇1】

大学库课件【篇2】

大学库课件【篇3】

大学库课件【篇4】

大学库课件【篇5】

大学库课件【篇6】

大学库课件【篇7】

大学库课件【篇8】

大学库课件【篇9】

大学库课件【篇10】

大学库课件【篇11】

大学库课件【篇12】

大学库课件【篇13】

大学库课件【篇14】

大学库课件【篇15】

2023桂花雨课件(精品十五篇)

桂花雨课件(篇1)

桂花雨课件(篇2)

桂花雨课件(篇3)

桂花雨课件(篇4)

桂花雨课件(篇5)

桂花雨课件(篇6)

桂花雨课件(篇7)

桂花雨课件(篇8)

桂花雨课件(篇9)

桂花雨课件(篇10)

桂花雨课件(篇11)

桂花雨课件(篇12)

桂花雨课件(篇13)

桂花雨课件(篇14)

桂花雨课件(篇15)

礼仪课课件精品五篇

礼仪课课件 篇1

礼仪课课件 篇2

礼仪课课件 篇3

礼仪课课件 篇4

礼仪课课件 篇5

2024高一英语课件(精品十五篇)

高一英语课件(篇1)

高一英语课件(篇2)

高一英语课件(篇3)

高一英语课件(篇4)

高一英语课件(篇5)

高一英语课件(篇6)

高一英语课件(篇7)

高一英语课件(篇8)

高一英语课件(篇9)

高一英语课件(篇10)

高一英语课件(篇11)

高一英语课件(篇12)

高一英语课件(篇13)

高一英语课件(篇14)

高一英语课件(篇15)

礼仪课课件篇1

礼仪课课件篇2

礼仪课课件篇3

礼仪课课件篇4

礼仪课课件篇5